
Glass. 






Book 

if? ^ 



No. 178* 



HANDBOOK OF THE 

4.7-INCH GUN MATERIEL 

MODEL OF IBM 

MOTORIZED 

WITH INSTRUCTIONS FOR ITS CARE 



TWENTY-FOUR PLATES 



MARCH 25, %n% 




WASHINGTON 
GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFOTCfc 



i m wwmim> nwmn 




Class 
Book 



X 



No. 1784 



U.S. c ; ,-f - 

HANDBOOK OF THE 

4.7-INCH GUN MATERIEL 

MODEL OF 1906 

MOTORIZED 

WITH INSTRUCTIONS FOR ITS CARE 



TWENTY-FOUR PLATES 



MARCH 25, 1918 




WASHINGTON 

GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE 

1918 






^ 



War Department, 
Office of the Chief of Ordnance, 

Washington, March 25, 1918. 
This manual is published for the information and government of 
the Army of the United States. 
By order of the Secretary of War: 

Chas. B. Wheeler, 
Brigadier General, Ordnance, National Army, 

Acting Chief of Ordnance. 

(2) 

•7 •* ». 

JUL 24 ItfS 



^ 



CONTENTS. 



Page. 

list of plates 5 

List of equipment 6 

Gun: 

Weights, dimensions, etc 7 

Description 7-14 

Care of 15 

Addenda applying to guns numbered 2 to 53, inclusive. . 15 
Ammunition: 

Cartridge case 17 

Primer 18 

Powder charge 19 

Projectiles: 

60-pound common steel shell 19 

45-pound common steel shell, Mark 1 20 

Common steel shell, Mark I, gas filled 20 

Shrapnel 21 

Fuzes: 

Combination fuzes 21 

Frankford Arsenal 31-second combination fuze 22 

Base detonating fuze 24 

Adapter and booster casing, Mark II 24 

Adapter and booster casing, Mark IV 25 

Point detonating fuze I. A. L. , Mark III 25 

Point detonating fuze, Mark V Z..* 26 

Identifying paint marks on delay action fuzes 27 

Marking on ammunition packing boxes. 27 

Marking on fuze packing boxes .... 27 

Weight markings on shell 28 

Subcaliber and drill cartridge kit 28 

Allowance of ammunition 28 

Care of cartridge cases 29 

Range tables 29 

Hand fuze setter, model of 1913 29 

4.7-inch gun drill cartridge 30 

Reloading and cleaning outfit 31 

Misfires and hangfires 31 

Carriage: 

Weights, dimensions, etc 31 

Nomenclature of parts 32 

Description 45 

Dismounting and assembling 58 

Care and cleaning of recoil cylinders and other parts 65 

(3) 



4.7-ineh gun and 6-inch howitzer limber, model of 1905 67 

Weights, dimensions, etc 67 

Nomenclature of parts 68 

Description 70 

4.7-inch gu n caisson, model of 1916 71 

Weights, dimensions, etc 71 

Nomenclature of parts 72 

Description 76 

4.7-inch gun caisson, model of 1917 79 

Weights, dimensions, etc 79 

Nomenclature of parts 79 

Description 84 

Motorized equipment 86 

Cyclometer 87 

Padlocks and bolt snaps 87 

Sight and quadrants: 

Line sight 8S 

Front sight 88 

Rear sight 88 

Panoramic sight, model of 1017 90 

Range quadrant 97 

Use of 99 

€are of - 100 

Adjustment of 101 

Spare sights and quadrants — 105 

Adjusting instruments 105 

Targets 105 

General information : 

Painting artillery materiel 105 

Oils for artillery materiel 105 

Repairs of Field Artillery materiel 107 

Instructions for riveting 107 

Suggestions for care and maintenance of materiel 108 

Supplies in general Ill 

Total equipment of one battery together with expendable 

supplies - 112 

Index --- 133 



LIST OF PLATES 

Faces page. 

Plate I. 4.7-inch gun, model of 1906 7 

II. 4.7-inch gun, model of 1906, breech mechanism as- 
sembly 8 

III. 4.7-inch gun, model of 1906, breech mechanism as- 

sembly 11 

IV. Shell, shrapnel, and cartridge case for 4.7-inch gun. 18 
Y. 31-second F. A. fuze 22 

VI. Adapter and booster casing, mark II 25 

VIL Mark III fuze I. A. L 26 

VIII, Mark V fuze 26 

IX. Sample marking for shell packing box 27 

X. Hand fuze setter 29 

XI. 4.7-inch gun carriage, side elevation, model of 1906, 

for carriages with Serial Nos. 1-40, inclusive 45 

XII. 4.7-inch gun carriage, model of 1906, plan for car- 
riages with Serial Nos. 1-40, inclusive 46 

XIII. 4.7-inch gun carriage, model of 1906, vertical sec- 

tions for carriages with Serial Nos. 1-40, inclusive . 48 

XIV. 4.7-inch gun carriage, model of 1906, views of carriages 

with Serial Nos. above 40 52 

XV. 4.7-inch gun carriage, model of 1906, traversing gear 

and pintle bearing vertical sections 5,3 

XVI. 4.7-inch gun carriage, model of 1906, elevating gear 

for carriages with Serial Nos. 1-40, inclusive 54 

XVII. 4.7-inch gun carriage, model of 1906 (band brake). . 56 
XVIII. 4.7-inch gun and 6-inch howitzer limber, model of 

1905 70 

XIX. 4.7-inch gun caisson, model of 1916 (tire brake) 76 

XX. 4.7-inch gun caisson, model of 1916 (band brake). . . 77 

XXI. 4.7-inch gun caisson, model of 1917 84 

XXII. 4.7-inch gun, rear sight 88 

XXIII. Panoramic sight, model of 1 91 7 92 

XXIV. 4.7-inch gun, range quadrant 98 

(5) 



LIST OF EQUIPMENT. 



No. 



Equipment. 



Property 
classification. 



Class. 



tion. 



4.7-inch guns, model of 1906 

4.7-inch gun carriages, model of 1906 

4.7-inch gun and 6-inch howitzer limbers, model of 1905 

Caissons, model of 1916 or model of 1917 * 

Tractors, 5-ton 

Ammunition trucks 

Artillery supply truck 

Telephone and "motor battery type truck 

Reconnaissance car 

3-ton 4-wheel drive trucks 

5-passenger motor cars 

Motorcycles with side cars 

Reel truck, model of 1918 

Set of fire-control equipment , 



IV 



i Six caissons model of 1908 may be substituted for 6 caissons model of 1917 or 1916, 
6 caisson limbers model of 1908 may be substituted for 6 caissons. A description of 
the caisson and caisson limber model of 1908 is in handbook No. 1771, revised Sep- 
tember 15, 1917. 

(6) 



REARUNE S/6MT 
H/NGE LIMA — 




/ 

BREECH RECESS 
RECOIL LUO r 
W CYLINDER END STUO 



LJ 



n 



EE 




XTRACTOft fi£C£ 



49877° — 18. (To face p. 7.) 



HANDBOOK OF THE 4.7-INCH GUN MATERIEL, 
MODEL OF 1906. 



THE 4.7-INCH GUN, MODEL OF 1906. 

WEIGHTS, DIMENSIONS, ETC. 

Weight pounds. . 2, 688 

Caliber inches. . 4. 7 

Total length do 134. 92 

Length of bore do.... 129.42 

Length of rifle portion of bore do 111. 9 

Number of grooves 42 

Width of grooves inches. . . 2116 

Depth of groove do 04 

Width of lands do 14 

Twist of rifling, right hand, ] turn in 50 calibers at origin 
to 1 turn in 25 calibers at 14.9 inches from muzzle, 
thence uniform. 
Rifling, semicubic parabola in form. 

Travel of projectile .inches. . 114. 9 

Weight of projectile, filled and fuzed, for base fuzed shell and 

shrapnel pounds. . 60 

Weight of projectile, filled and point fuzes do 45 

Weight of powder charge ounces. . 95 

Weight of cartridge case pounds. . 8 

Capacity of cartridge case cubic inches. . 251 

Muzzle velocity, 60-pound shell and shrapnel, feet per sec- 
ond 1, 700 

Muzzle velocity, 45-pound shell l feet per second . . 2, 050 

Maximum pressure per square inch pounds. . 36, 000 

Maximum range at 15° elevation x meters. . 8, 750 

Maximum range at 25° elevation * do 11, 100 

Center of gravity of gun from rear face of breech inches. . 51 

DESCRIPTIONS 

(Plate I.) 

The 4.7-inch gun is built up consisting of a tube, jacket, locking 
hoop, and clip. Guns numbered 1 to 21, inclusive, are of gun steel; 
those after No. 21 are of nickel steel. The jacket envelops the rear 
portion of the tube and projects beyond it to form the breech recess 

1 Calculated values. Actual values will bo in the range tables that are being pre- 
pared as fast as data is available. 
3 See note on page 15 in regard to guns numbered 2 to 53, inclusive. 

(7) 



4.7 /M 6 UN MODEL OF 1906. 



PLATE I. 



RCARUNes/SHT 
<C HM6£LVCs=- 



FfiONT UH£ SIGHT 




1 


/■ 














? 
















Lr 


\ MA1H CUP 








^CUIO£/iA/L CUPS 



fOR CYLINDER END STVO 




_ " " . . 5 ■' , / / / ////#& 



CLASS 3e.DIV.2.DR/tW. HO. 



HANDBOOK OF THE 4.7-INCH GUN MATERIEL, 
MODEL OF 1906. 



THE 4.7-INCH GUN, MODEL OF 1906. 

WEIGHTS, DIMENSIONS, ETC. 

Weight pounds. . 2, 688 

Caliber inches. . 4. 7 

Total length do. . . . 134. 92 

Length of bore do 129.42 

Length of rifle portion of bore do 111. 9 

Number of grooves 42 

Width of grooves inches. . . 2116 

Depth of groove do 04 

Width of lands do. . . . .14 

Twist of rifling, right hand, ] turn in 50 calibers at origin 
to 1 turn in 25 calibers at 14.9 inches from muzzle, 
thence uniform. 
Rifling, semicubic parabola in form. 

Travel of projectile .inches. . 114. 9 

Weight of projectile, filled and fuzed, for base fuzed shell and 

shrapnel pounds. . 60 

Weight of projectile, filled and point fuzes do 45 

Weight of powder charge ounces. . 95 

Weight of cartridge case pounds. . 8 

Capacity of cartridge case cubic inches. . 251 

Muzzle velocity, 60-pound shell and shrapnel, feet per sec- 
ond 1, 700 

Muzzle velocity, 45-pound shell l feet per second . . 2, 050 

Maximum pressure per square inch pounds. . 36, 000 

Maximum range at 15° elevation x meters. . 8, 750 

Maximum range at 25° elevation * do 11, 100 

Center of gravity of gun from rear face of breech inches. . 51 

DESCRIPTIONS 

(Plate I.) 

The 4.7-inch gun is built up consisting of a tube, jacket, locking 
hoop, and clip. Guns numbered 1 to 21, inclusive, are of gun steel; 
those after No. 21 are of nickel steel. The jacket envelops the rear 
portion of the tube and projects beyond it to form the breech recess 

1 Calculated values. Actual values will bo in the range tables that are being pre- 
pared as fast as data is available. 
3 See note on page 15 in regard to guns numbered 2 to 53, inclusive. 

(7) 



8 

or seat for the breechblock. A lug, known as the recoil lug, projects 
from the under surface of the jacket at its extreme rear end' and 
affords a point of attachment for the recoil cylinder of the carriage. 
To this lug is also attached the spring rod yoke, to the ends of which 
are secured the spring rods. A lug in the right of the jacket at its 
rear end provides a point of support for the block earner, which is 
held in place by the hinge pin. A seat for the extractor is also 
formed in this lug, passing through it into the breech recess. 

The locking hoop's function is to secure the jacket from any longi- 
tudinal motion to the rear with respect to the tube. It is joined to 
the forward end of the jacket by means of a left-baud screw thread 
of one and one-eighth turns. A shoulder in the hoop bears against a 
shoulder on the tube. The locking hoop, in addition to being screw- 
threaded, is also assembled -with a shrinkage. 

The clip is a short hoop shrunk on the tube near the muzzle, A 
cylindrical surface having a shoulder is formed on the tube as a seat 
for the clip. In addition to the shrinkage the clip is secured by a 
pin driven transversely through the hoop near its rear end. 

On each side of the gun and extending the full length of the jacket 
and locking hoop is formed a supporting clip. The bottom surfaces 
of these clips are parallel to the axis of the bore and are in contact 
with the top surfaces of the cradle rails on which the gun slides during 
recoil. On the underside of the gun and extending the entire length 
of the jacket, locking hoop, and clip are formed recoil guides or clips 
which fit under and secure the gun to the rails of the cradle and also 
serve to guide the gun during recoil. 

When the gun is assembled upon the carriage a sheet-steel dust 
guard is secured to the front face of the locking hoop and the rear 
face of the clip, thus protecting from dust and dirt the bearing sur- 
faces of the guide rails between these points. Eight oil holes closed 
by handy oilers are provided for oiling the guide rails and recoil 
surfaces. 

BREECH MECHANISM. 
(Plate II and III.) 

The breechblock is of the interrupted-screw type and is provided 
with four threaded and four slotted sectors. The front end of the 
axial recess in the block for the hub of the block carrier is closed by 
a bushing. Three vent holes leading from a cavity in the bushing 
to the rear through the breechblock permit the escape of gas from a 
ruptured primer. On a semicircular boss on the rear face of the 
breechblock are cut gear teeth, in which the gear teeth of the oper- 
ating lever bevel gear mesh. The upper end of the circular boss on 
which the gear teeth are cut serves as a stop to limit the rotation 
of the block in the unlocked position. This upper end of the cir- 
cular boss comes in contact with a hardened steel stop which is 
fastened by two screws to the outer face of carrier extending through 
and projecting from the inner face of block carrier. 

In order that no relative movement between the breech block 
and block carrier can take place, a block latch, pivoted on the inner 



<?. 7/N. GUN MODEL OF 1906 
BREECH MECHANISM ASSEMBLY 



PLRTE XT 




HINGE PIN 



BLOCK CARRIER- 
HINGE LUG 



TRIGGCR FORK 
EXTRACTOR 



-TIRING HANDLE 

TRIP LRTCIi P LUNGE R- 

TRIGGCR SHAFT 

SHAFT RETAINING COLLAR- 

BREECH BLOCK 

TRIGGER SHAFT DETENT 



LOCKING BOLT NUT — 
TRIPLATCH 
10 JUSTING SCREW CHECK NUT 
r-RDJU-STING SCREW 



BLOCK LATCH 

PIVOT PIN 
BLOCK LRTCH PIVOT- 
OPERATING LEVER 

PIVOT- 
TRAY LATCH STOP- 



FIRING HANDLE SHAFT & PALLET- 




CLHSS ZB. DIV. Z . DRfiW. III. 



face of the carrier in the lower left-hand quadrant, engages a notch 
or shoulder cut in the rear face of the block adjacent to the circular 
hub on which the gear teeth are cut. This latch is so pivoted that 
as the mechanism is swungfree from the gun it moves forward suffi- 
ciently to engage the notch in the block, and also to cause the forward 
plane of the latch to project beyond the front of the block carrier; 
consequently when the mechanism is swung _ to the closed position 
the front face of the latch comes in contact with the rear face of the 
breech of the gun, thus forcing the latch out of the notch in the 
breechblock back into a recess in the carrier, and by continuing the 
motion of closing the mechanism the breechblock is free to rotate on 
the hub of the carrier and engages its threads with those in the gun. 
Displacement of the firing lock case due to a blowback is prevented 
by four lugs on the firing lock case, which are arranged to interlock 
with corresponding lugs on the block carrier. The breechblock is 
mounted eccentrically in the breech of the gun, with reference to 
the axis of the bore, and is concentrically mounted on a hub on the 
block carrier, in which the firing lock case is fitted. 

The firing lock case is eccentrically fitted in the hub of the block 
canier in such a position that the axis of the firing pin is always in 
line with the bore of the gun. The bushing in the front end of the 
breechblock, through which the firing pin passes, when in the 
fired position is fitted eccentrically with reference to the breech- 
block and is provided with a cavity of such dimensions that the 
breechblock is permitted to revolve freely about the firing pin, 
which is fixed in the hub of the block carrier and does not rotate. 
The point of the firing pin, when at rest, is always within the en- 
larged cavity in the bushing, and when the block is revolved to the 
unlocked^ position, the hole in the bushing through which the point 
of tha firing pin passes is moved to one side, due to the eccentric 
arrangement of the breechblock, thus masking the point of the pin 
and preventing any possible contact between the firing pin and the 
primer in the cartridge case when the block is unlocked. The 
block will be practically fully locked before any contact between 
the firing pin and the primer can take place. The firing pin is pro- 
vided with a shoulder a short distance in rear of the forward end, 
which comes in contact with the rear face of the bushing if an attempt 
is made to fire the gun when the breech is unlocked. This is done 
to prevent any blow from coming on the point of the firing pin and 
injuring the same. 

The loading tray is located in the breech recess and serves to 
protect the two lowest threaded sectors in the breech recess from 
being bruised by the cartridge when loading the gun. Its middle 
portion is cut away in order to clear the lowest threaded sector on 
the block when the latter is closed. It is locked to the gun when 
the breech is open by the tray latch which is located in the rear 
lower face of the jacket and engages a slot in the rear lip of the tray. 
The latch is so placed that as the block carrier strikes the face of the 
breech it forces the latch to disengage its seat in the tray. As the 
block rotates, its lowest threaded sector which engages the tray 
causes the latter to rotate, its front and rear lips sliding in seats pro- 
vided for that purpose in the breech recess. 



10 



FIRING MECHANISM. 

The firing mechanism belongs to that type known as a continuous 
pull mechanism; that is, the mechanism is cocked and fired by 
the pull on the lanyard or the downward pressure on the firing 
handle. This arrangement gives greater safety against prematures 
and permits of a quick repetition of the blow from the firing pin in 
case of a misfire. 

FIRING PIN. 

The firing pin is mounted in the firing lock case. Near its front 
end it is provided with a collar which serves to guide the pin axially, 
and as a shoulder for the front end of the firing spring. It also 
serves as a means for preventing the forward movement of the firing 
pin until the firing spring has been compressed by the action of the 
lanyard or firing handle. The rear end of the firing pin is rectangular 
in cross section and is provided with a double lug against which the 
trigger fork engages at a point between its upper end and its axis. 
The engagement serves as a means of forcing the firing pin to its 
retracted or normal position, after the pin has been released and 
forced forward. Opposite the double lug for the trigger fork, the 
firing pin is provided with a smaller lug, which fits into a slot in the 
firing spring sleeve and serves to hold the sleeve in its proper posi- 
tion for assembling the trigger fork. This provides a space between 
the rear face of the sleeve and the double lug on the firing pin. 
Through this space the trigger fork may be inserted by hand to its 
proper position. 

FIRING PIN SPRING. 

The firing pin spring is threaded over the firing pin from the 
rear end. Over this is assembled the firing spring sleeve in such 
a manner that when it is seated in its proper position the firing pin 
spring is put under an initial tension by being compressed between 
the collar on the front end of the firing pin and a shoulder or seat 
formed on the inside of the sleeve at its rear end. The rear end of 
the firing spring has a tang which fits in a recess drilled in the bearing 
surface of the firing spring sleeve. 



The sear, which is in the form of a leaf spring, is seated in a slot in 
the firing lock case. It is provided with a thickened forward end, 
having a notch cut in it, in which a hardened portion of the periphery 
of the collar on the firing pin engages. Immediately in rear of this 
notch in the sear an inclined surface is provided, upon which the 
forward end of the firing spring sleeve acts in its forward motion to 
compress the firing pin spring and fire the gun. After the sleeve 
under the action of the trigger fork has traveled the required distance 
forward to produce the proper compression to the firing pin spring 
the sear is forced outward, thus releasing the engagement between 
the sear and the collar of the firing pin. The firing pin being 




PLATE IE 



BLOCK CARRIE, 
BREECH BLOCK 

'^extractor Tfiumon 
" extractor «"*»«*> V/ 



f/R/fft} LOCK CABS' 



4. 7 //V. GUN 
MODEL OF /906 
BREECtt MECHAMSM 
ASSEMBLY 




TRAYLATt 

tray latch stop 



CLfiS336.DIV. Z.DRRW. 112. 



11 

released moves forward under the action of the firing pin spring and 
fires the gun. On the rear end of the sear a cylindrical projection is 
formed which fits into a hole drilled into the firing lock case. This 
sefcves to hold the sear in place. 

TRIGGER FORK. 

The trigger fork is seated in the rear of the firing lock case and is 
constrained from displacement laterally by the walls of the firing 
lock case. It engages the squared end of the trigger shaft. The 
trigger fork is bifurcated on the end which engages the firing pin and 
sleeve, and it is seated so that the flat sides of the filing pin pass 
between the bifurcated end of the fork and the rear face of the 
bifurcated end bears against the front faces of the double lug on the 
firing pin at a point located about halfway between the end of the 
trigger fork and its axis. This point of contract between the firing 
pin and trigger fork is important, as it helps to maintain the proper 
operation of the firing pin in its return action after firing. The 
extreme bifurcated ends of the trigger fork are made in the form of a 
circle, and these ends bear against a fiat surface on the rear end of 
the firing spring sleeve perpendicular to the axis of the sleeve. The 
fork does not touch the filing spring sleeve at any other point. The 
firing spring is under tension at all times and exerts an equal pressure 
between the collar on the front end of the firing pin and its seat in 
the rear end of the filing spring sleeve. The pressure on the firing 
pin collar is transmitted to the trigger fork at the bearing between 
the latter and the double lug on the firing pin, while the pressure on 
the spring seat in the sleeve is transmitted to the trigger fork at its 
extreme bifurcated ends. These two forces are equal and opposite 
in direction, but have different lever arms with respect to the axis 
of rotation of the fork. The fork is, therefore, acted upon by a 
varying couple the moment of which is sufficient, when the trigger 
shaft is released, to rotate the trigger fork to the rear, carrying with 
it the firing pin through the medium of the double lug on its rear 
end. This motion continues until the filing pin collar engages the 
sear, at which time the spring, sleeve, trigger fork, and firing pin 
are in the normal position and the firing mechanism again ready for 
action, 

TRIGGER SHAFT. 

The trigger shaft is assembled in a, projection which forms a part 
of the firing lock case and is held in place by a wire detent. Its 
function is to rotate the trigger fork forward in firing. It has at its 
upper end a squared portion on which the fork is mounted. At its 
lower end are two projections, the larger of which is provided with a 
hole for the attachment of a lanyard by which the gun should be 
fired until the spade at the end of the trail is sufficiently embedded 
in the ground to hold the carriage in place. The other projection 
on the trigger shaft is acted upon by the filing pallet, which is an 
extension of the firing handle shaft. This latter arrangement serves 
as a means of filing the gun from a seat on the carriage. 



12 



FIRING LOCK CASE. 

The firing lock case is designed to contain the complete firing 
mechanism. By this means the entire firing mechanism can be 
replaced in an instant. It contains the firing pin, firing pin spring, 
firing spring sleeve, sear, trigger fork, trigger shaft, and detent. It is 
provided with four lugs by which it is locked in place in the hub of 
the block carrier. 

The firing lock case is held from displacement due to rotation by 
a spring catch or locking bolt. This locking bolt is fitted in a pro- 
jection of the firing lock case and the inner end enters a recess or 
seat in the rear face of the block carrier. 

OPERATING LEVER. 

The handle and body of the lever is recessed to receive the lever 
latch. The inner end of the lever is provided with beveled gear 
teeth, which mesh with corresponding teeth on the breechblock 
and serve as a means for opening and closing the mechanism. The 
lever is seated between two lugs on the block carrier and is held in 
place by a pivot. 

BLOCK CARRIER. 

The block carrier is hinged at its right side to the gun by means of 
the hinge pin. It is provided with a central inwardly projecting 
hub on which a left-hand thread of one and a half turns is cut, upon 
which the breechblock is concentrically mounted. The hub is 
bored out eccentrically to receive the firing lock case, which is held 
in place from, axial displacement by four lugs formed on the firing 
lock case and four lugs formed on the inside of the bore of the block 
carrier. Two lugs are formed on the rear face of the carrier just 
below its center. They form a seat for the operating lever. On the 
inner face in the lower left-hand quadrant a seat and pivot for the 
block latch is provided. In the upper right-hand quadrant on the 
outer face a block stop is screwed which has a steel lug that extends 
through and projects from the inner face of the earner. This limits 
the rotation of the block in the open position. On the right side of 
the carrier a projecting pallet is attached which serves to operate the 
extractor. 

BLOCK LATCH. 

A recess in the latch contains a spring winch presses against the 
inner face of the block carrier, forcing the latch forward into its lock- 
ing recess in the block, when the breech is open. When the block 
is locked, the latch rests against the rear face of the jacket. The 
latch serves to prevent rotation of the block when in its open position. 

THE EXTRACTOR. 

The extractor is located in a seat formed in the jacket. It is 
operated by the block earner, the pallet on the latter serving to give 
it a quick throw at the end of the swing of the carrier in opening the 



mechanism. The extractor rolls on its forwarder convex face and 
is prevented from being displaced by its trunnions, which slide in 
grooves formed in the top and bottom of the extractor seat. A lip in 
the extractor engages the rim of the cartridge case and serves as a 
means for ejecting the same. 

OPERATING LEVER LATCH. 

The latch is fitted in a seat formed in the operating lever and 
serves to lock the handle from rotation, which in turn prevents rota- 
tion of the block. The latch rotates about a long steel pivot, which 
is so fitted that it interlocks with the lever latch under the action of 
the lever latch spring. 

HINGE PIN. 

This is a hardened steel pin, and is held from displacement by a 
spring catch fitted to its lower end. A handy oiler seated in its top 
surface supplies oil to a spiral groove formed on its surface. 

ACTION OP THE BREECH MECHANISM. 

To open the breech, grasp the operating lever handle; at the same 
time compress the lever latch handle. This releases the latch from 
the catch on the block carrier. Rotate the operating lever to the 
rear. Dining the first part of this movement (67J°) the block and 
loading tray are rotated to their unlocked positions, at which time 
the stop on the block comes in contact with the stop on the block 
carrier and the tray latch opposite its seat in the loading tray. The 
block latch will drop into its notch in the block and the tray latch 
engage the tray at the moment of swinging the block earner from the 
gun. The block is now locked against further rotation in either 
direction. Dining a further rotation of the operating lever of about 
101° the block and block carrier swing about the hinge pin clear of 
the breech recess, the block carrier operates the extractor, unseating 
the cartridge case before the end of the 90° movement, and finally, 
as the pallet on the block carrier engages the extractor, the latter is 
given a quick throw which ejects the case free of the gun. 

When another round is inserted the rim of the cartridge case comes 
hi contact with the extractor and forces it partly home. In closing 
the mechanism the movements are simply the reverse of opening; as 
the block comes in contact with the breech face of the gun the block 
latch is forced rearward, the tray latch forward, unlocking the block 
from the block carrier and the loading tray from the gun. Further 
rotation of the operating lever rotates the breechblock and loading 
tray, causing the threads of the former to engage those of the gun. 
This engagement of threads moves the block forward, due to the pitch 
of the threads, and firmly seats the cartridge in the chamber. At the 
final motion of the operating lever its latch engages the catch on the 
rear face of the block carrier, locking the block in the closed position. 
The gun is now ready to fire. 



14 



TO DISMANTLE THE FIRING MECHANISM. 

Take hold of the locking bolt situated' at the lower end of the firing 
lock case, pull it to the rear, then revolve the firing lock case upward 
about 45° and pull it gently to the rear. This will remove from the 
gun the firing lock case with the firing mechanism complete. Press 
the trigger shaft detent until it disengages from the notch in the 
firing lock case. This will allow the trigger shaft, with its detent, to 
be withdrawn. Then gently press on the front of the firing pin, 
forcing it back into the firing lock case. This will allow the trigger 
fork to be removed. Then, with one finger placed on the front end of 
the sear, force it outward; at the same time grasp the front end of the 
firing pin. Give it a sharp pull. This will remove the firing pin 
spring and sleeve from the firing lock case. Then place the front end 
of the firing pin against a block of wood, bear down on the firing 
spring sleeve until the spring is compressed sufficiently to disengage 
the slot in the rear end of the sleeve from the small lug on the rear 
end of the firing Din. Slightly turn the sleeve, and it can be sepa- 
rated from the spring and pin. By an unscrewing motion the spring 
can be removed from the pin. The sear can be removed by gently 
pressing it toward the center of the firing lock case. 

To assemble, reverse these operations, taking care before driving 
too hard on the end of the trigger shaft that the square hole in the 
trigger fork is in position to receive the tapered end of the trigger 
shaft. No tools are required for assembling or dismantling the firing 
mechanism except possibly a small rod or stick to pry out the trigger 
fork. 

TO DISMANTLE THE BREECH MECHANISM. 

Grasp the operating lever and open the mechanism; when the 
mechanism is open, remove the firing lock case; force the pivot of 
the operating lever up and remove the lever. Take out screws 
retaining block stop and remove the block stop. Force the block 
latch out of its seat in the block by pressing it into its seat in the 
carrier; take hold of the block and revolve it to the right until the 
threads of the block are disengaged from the threads on the hub; 
then pull the block to the rear. The block latch can now be readily 
removed. The lever latch can be removed by pressing in on the 
latch at a point near its lower end and opposite its pivot. A hole in 
the latch is cut eccentric with reference ro the pivot, and a shoulder 
on the pivot prevents their displacement until the latch is forced in 
and the hole is concentric with the pivot. When this occurs, the 
pivot can be readily pulled out and the latch removed. < To remove 
the block carrier, force the hinge pin up by hand until it can be 
caught by the head; if the pin sticks, by swinging the block carrier 
back and forth it can readily be loosened. The extractor can now 
be removed from its seat. Pressing on the tray latch sufficiently to 
force it into its seat permits the loading tray to be removed from the 
breech recess. Reverse these operations for assembling the 
mechanism. 



15 

CARE OF THE GUN. 

After firing, the bore of the gun should be cleaned to remove the 
residue of smokeless powder, and then oiled. In cleaning, wash the 
bore with a solution made by dissolving one-half pound of sal soda 
in 1 gallon of boiling water. After washing with the soda solution, 
wipe perfectly dry, and then oil the bore with a thin coating of the 
slushing oil furnished for the purpose. A slush brush for use in oiling 
the bore will be issued by the Ordnance Department upon requi- 
sition. 

The breech mechanism should be kept clean and well oiled. It 
should be dismounted from time to time for examination and oiled 
when assembled. 

GUNS 2 TO 53. 

The foregoing description of the breech and firing mechanism 
applies to guns numbered above 63. The following changes in 
description will apply to guns numbered from 2 to 53, inclusive. 
The points of difference on these guns are that the hub of the carrier 
is not threaded to the breechblock and the block stop is riveted to 
the inner face of the carrier. 

BREECH MECHANISM. 

The upper end of the circular boss on which the gear teeth are 
cut comes in contact with a hardened-steel stop riveted to the inner 
face of the block carrier. A radial lug or tooth projects from the 
inner surface of the breechblock and engages an L-shaped slot cut 
in the hub of the block carrier, so that when the mechanism is un- 
locked no relative movement between the breechblock and the 
block carrier can take place. 

When the breechblock is in the locked position, a lug on the 
firing lock case engages the front face of the tooth or lug on the 
breechblock, which locks the breechblock to the block carrier. 
This engagement between the lug on the breechblock and the lug 
on the firing lock case serves to lock the block carrier to the breech- 
block and prevent displacement due to a blowback. 

FIRING LOCK CASE. 

It is provided with four lugs by which it is locked in place in 
the hub of the block carrier, and one lug forward of the other four, 
which engages behind a lug on the breechblock. This lug, together 
with the other four which lock the case to the carrier, serves to lock 
the block and carrier together. 

BLOCK CARRIER. 

In the forward end of the central hub a slot is cut which extends 
to the rear and terminates in an L. This receives the lug on the 
breechblock and holds the block from displacement when the 
mechanism is open. In the upper right-hand quadrant on the inner 
face a hardened-steel block stop is riveted. This limits the rotation 
of the block in the open position. 



16 



TO DISMANTLE THE BREECH MECHANISM. 

Grasp the operating lever and open the mechanism; when the 
mechanism is open, force the block latch out of its seat in the block 
by pressing it into its seat in the carrier. Take hold of the block 
and revolve it to the left until it stops; then pull it to the rear off 
the carrier. 

NOMENCLATURE OF PARTS OF GUN AND BREECH MECHANISM. 

Note. — In all reports and correspondence the gun and breech 
mechanism should be designated by the number, model, etc., as 
stamped _ thereon. When requisitioning replacement parts, the 
parts desired should be referred to by the names given in the nomen- 
clature of parts herein, and the piece numbers should be copied 
exactly as stamped upon the unserviceable pieces. 



Num- 
ber re- 
quired. 


Name of part. 


Location. 


Property 
classification. 


Class. 


Sec- 
tion. 


1 




Hinged to right side of jacket.. 
Left inside face of carrier 


IV 




1 


Block latch 




1 






1 




Upper right quadrant of carrier 

Carried on hub of carrier 

Abutting against block stop 
on the right. 




1 






1 






2 






1 


Clip '.. 


Encircles tube near the muzzle. 

In recess right side of jacket 

On outer face of carrier 




1 






1 






1 










Encircles firing pin 




1 




Encircle*-' rear of li ring spring. . . 

On top of locking hoop | 

Held in lugs at right of jacket . . ] 
In bottom part of hinge pin. . .1 




1 


Front line sight 




] 










.-, 


] 




Left of carrier, through block 

latch. 

Inside of operating lever 

Lower left quadrant of carrier , 

face. 
Secures lever catch 




1 


Lever latch pivot 




1 






1 


Lever catch screw 




1 


Inside operating lever and 

handle. 
In handle of operating lever. 
Inserted m tubs after if ;;or;;a. 

Hear end of tube and liner 1 

In breech recess 1 




i 






l 






i 








l 






l 






l 




Through locking bolt nut ! 

Encircles locking bolt nut j 

Encircles tube forward of 
jacket. I 




l 
i 


Locking bolt spring 











17 



Num- 
ber re- 

q uired. 



j Property 
: classification. 



Name of part. 



Locking bolt knob 

Operating lever 

Operating lever pivot. 

Pallet.. 

Pallet sere ,v 

Pivot pin 

Plug.......... 

Rear line sight 

Rear line sight screws 

Sear 

Tray latch 

Tray latch spring 

Tray latch stop 

Trigger fork 

Trigger shaft 

Trigger shaft detent . . 

Tube 

Vent bushing 



Location. 



Class. 



Head of looking bolt nut 

Pivoted to outer face of carrier. 
Held in lugs on outer face of 

carrier. 

On right of carrier 

Secures pallet 

Secures latch pivot 

Firing lock case 

On top of rear end of jacket. . . 

Secure rear line sight 

In firing lock case 

In jacket directly below breech 

recess. 

Behind tray latch 

Screw retaining tray latch 

At head of trigger shaft 

In firing lock case 

At base of trigger shaft in 

firing lock case. 

Interior of gun 

Inside face of breech block 



IV 



Sec- 
tion. 



AMMUNITION. 



(Plates IV, V, VI, VII, VIII, IX, and X.) 

Fixed ammunition is used in the 4.7-inch gun and is made up with 
shrapnel or with two types of high explosive common steel shell, 
either base fuzed or point fuzed. The rounds as made up vary 
slightly in length with the type of projectile used. Battery ammu- 
nition chests are of sufficient size to take each kind of ammunition 
furnished. The number of each type to be carried is subject to 
regulation by proper authority. Shrapnel and base fuzed common 
steel shell are issued filled and fuzed. ^ The point fuzed common 
steel shell is issued filled and containing an adapter and booster 
casing with booster charge of high explosive. ^ These point fuzed 
shells are never issued fuzed, owing to the sensitiveness of the fuzes 
when combined with the adapter and booster casing. Under no 
circumstances should they be carried fuzed in caissons or limbers 
alter having been fuzed in the field. Base fuzed common steel shell 
and common shrapnel weigh 60 pounds; point fuzed steel shell weighs 
approximately 45 pounds. The components of each round are, the 
cartridge case with primer, the powder charge, projectile, and fuze. 

49877°— 18 2 



18 

CARTRIDGE CASE. 

(Plate IV.) 

The cartridge case is a solid drawn brass case 16.6 inches long. 
It has a capacity of 251 cubic inches, and weighs with primer 7.875 
pounds. The head or base of the case has a projecting flange or 
rim under which the lip of the extractor engages. The center of 
the base is bored out to form a seat into which the primer is forced. 
The primer seats are mandreled to near finished dimensions with 
a tapered steel plug to toughen the metal of the cartridge case around 
the primer seat and then reamed to finished size. This toughening 
is necessary to prevent expansion of the seat under gas pressure with 
a consequent looseness of the primer after repriming. The primer 
is inserted in the case by means of a primer inserting press to avoid 
injury to the primer seat or explosion of the primer. Special decap- 
ping tools are issued for use in removing exploded primers from 
cartridge cases. 

A circular groove is cut in the base of the cartridge case and is 
painted red to indicate rounds of shrapnel with 31-second fuze 
designed prior to war contracts. 

Subsequent 31-second shrapnel and 45-second shrapnel rounds 
will not be marked so, but will be identified by the fuze itself. High 
explosive point detonating 45-pound shell rounds will have a black 
stripe painted across the base of the cartridge case. 

THE PRIMER. 

(Plate IV.) 

To insure the ignition of smokeless-powder charges in cartridge 
cases it is necessary that the primers either contain in themselves, 
in addition to the percussion composition, an auxiliary charge of 
black powder, or that an auxiliary charge of such powder be placed at 
the rear of the. cartridge case to communicate the flame from the 
percussion primer and thoroughly ignite the smokeless powder. The 
percussion primer is known as the HO-griin percussion primer and 
contains an ignition charge of 110 grains of black powder in addition 
to the essential elements of a percussion primer. 

The 110-grain percussion primer is shown in Plate IV, and con- 
sists of a brass case resembling in shape a small-arms cartridge case. 
The head or rear end of the primer case is countersunk, forming a 
cup-shaped recess, in which is seated the cap or percussion primer 
proper. The latter consists of the cup, the anvil, and the percus- 
sion composition, assembled as shown on Plate IV. 

The percussion composition is known as the No. 70 mixture, and 
contains the following ingredients: 

Per ceiiu 

Antimony sulphide 17 

Potassium chlorate 53 

Trinitrotoluene 5 

Lead sulphocyanate 25 



r 5A5fr covee. 
eoTATins, da no. 



PL^TETSZ 



STEEL SHELL. MA£KH ADAPTER BOOSTER 



MARK'S* 
FUZE. 




connon stzil .shell maps l 



BASE DETOriATins FUZE MEDlUri CALI5EC. 
STEEL SH ELL. 




cohnon >5T£ll 5hell model or 1905. 



L00.5E SLACK POWDLB. .-.SHPAPNEL BALLS, r- CENTRAL TUBE 



STEEL HEAD. 
3! ..SECOND COMBINATION FUZE- 

rBCASS COVEg. 




■•P£1?CU55/0H CAP. 
r COM PRESSED POWDEI? 
-BODY. y — VENTS. 



^SHPAPrScTL, 



Tin FOIL 

wad: 



DEAS5 DIAPHEASM. 




-II0S2AIN PEPCUSSiOM PglMEg. 



CAt?T)?)PGE CA5E. 



Q 

SEE 



a. 4-. 6> a; 

■J L L-. l I I - „f 



10. inCHES 
^3 36-2,5-70. 



49877°— 18. (To face p. 18.) 



19 

The percussion cap recess is connected with the interior of the 
primer case by a small vent. The body of the case contains^ 110 
grains of black powder, constituting the rear " priming" or igniting 
charge for the smokeless powder. This black powder is inserted 
under a pressure of 36,000 pounds per square inch, and is pressed 
into the primer body around a central wire, which is then with- 
drawn, leaving a longitudinal hole the full length of the primer. 
Eight radial holes are drilled through the primer and compressed 
powder, affording 16 vents for the free exit of the black powder 
flames. After filling the case the front end of the case is closed by 
a cardboard wad covered with shellac, and the radial perforations 
in the body of the case are covered by a tinfoil wrapper to retain 
in the case any loose black powder, as well as to exclude all moisture. 

In action, the blow of the firing pin explodes the percussion cap, 
which ignites the black powder; the flames of the latter shoot out 
through the vents in the primer case and ignite the smokeless-powder 
charge. 

The primer just described and known as the 110-grain percussion 
primer is used only with smokeless-powder charges. 

1HE POWDER CHARGE. 

The powder charge is a nitrocellulose powder, composed of multi- 
perforated (7 perforations) cylindrical grains. The charge varies 
slightly for different lots of powder, but is approximately 95 ounces 
for 60-pound projectile and 112 ounces for 45-pound projectile. 
The granulation is determined so that the charge occupies about 
nine-tenths the space in the cartridge case, in rear of the projectile. 
In making up the cartridges a brass diaphragm is soldered in place 
next to the powder charge to avoid the possibility of moisture reach- 
ing the powder charge or the primer. The charge gives a muzzle 
velocity of 1,700 feet per second, with a maximum pressure in the 
bore not exceeding 33,000 pounds per square inch for 60-pound pro- 
jectile and 2,050 feet per second for 45-pound projectile with a max- 
imum pressure not exceeding 37,000 pounds. 

Service smokeless powder must not be used for blank cartridges. 
For that purpose the Ordnance Department furnishes special powder. 

PROJECTILES. 

60-POUND COMMON STEEL SHELL. 

(Plate IV.) 

The common steel shell is shown in Plate IV. It is provided 
with an ogival head struck with a radius of 2 calibers, and is fitted 
with a copper rotating band forced into an annular groove 1.9 inches 
from the base. Between the band and the base are cut three cir- 
cumferential grooves, the front one of which is filled with material 
insuring a waterproof joint in the assembled cartridge. This groove 
and the middle groove are used as crimping grooves. The rear 
groove, which is somewhat deeper than the others, is to allow the 



20 

projectile to be readily gripped to remove it from the caisson 
or limber when it is used as separate loading ammunition in the 
4.7-inch howitzer. In assembling the ammunition the shell is 
forced into the cartridge case up to the band, and the metal of the 
cartridge case is then set into the crimping grooves at several points, 
securely fixing the projectile in the case. The base of the shell is 
tapped for a base detonating fuze, medium caliber, and is fitted 
with a copper base cover secured in the base cover groove by lead 
calking wire. The base cover consists of a copper cover, and a lead 
disk lying between the cover and the projectile. The base cover 
seals the joint between fuze and shell against the entrance of pow- 
der gases into the sheU cavity . The shell contains a bursting charge 
of 3.36 pounds of trinitrotoluol. The weight of the shell, with 
bursting charge and fuze, is 60 pounds. The shell is always 
issued rilled and fuzed. 

POINT DETONATED SHELL. 

Common steel shell to accommodate three types of point detonat- 
ing fuzes, also a gas-filled common steel shell," to be fired with an 
instantaneous action point fuze, are the point fuzed shells for use 
with the 4.7-inch gun. 

45-POUND COMMON-STEEL SHELL, MARK I. 

(Plate IV.) 

This shell has an ogival head struck with a radius of 4.52 calibers and 
is fitted with a copper rotating band forced into an annular groove 1.9 
inches from the base. About 0.5 inch and 1 inch, respectively, be- 
low the rotating band, two circumferential grooves are cut to receive 
the crimping on of the cartridge case. 

In assembling the round the shell is forced into the case up to the 
band and the metal of the case is set into the grooves at several 
points, securely fixing it. 

Point fuzes only are used with this shell, which is tapped through 
the nose to receive the adapter for French type fuzes. The base 
cover consists of a lead disk covered by a brass base cover which is 
crimped into an undercut groove and calked with lead wire. This 
cover prevents danger of premature ignition of the bursting charge 
through penetration of flame while in the gun. The bursting charge 
consists of 6.07 pounds of cast T. N. T. or amatol. The weight of the 
shell, including bursting charge, adapter, and fuze, is approximately 
45 pounds. The three fuzes vary in weight from 0.6 pound to 1.2 
pounds. The shell is never issued fuzed. Shell fuzed in the field 
should be unfuzed before being carried in caissons or limbers. 

COMMON-STEEL SHELL, MARK I, GAS FILLED. 

The shell body of the 4.7-inch gas shell is identical with the point 
fuzed common-steel shell, except that it has no base cover, and that 
the tap hole to receive the adapter is tapered to make a gas-tight 
joint. The gas charge consists of phosgene or other gas which is 



21 

liquefied by cooling to —15° F. and poured in. A sufficient space 
is left to allow for expansion when the gas regains atmospheric tem- 
perature. The screwing in of the adapter seals the gas hermetically 
in the shell body. A booster charge, similar to the one used to 
explode the common-steel shell, is located in the adapter and is 
sufficient to open the nose of the shell and release the gas. Any of 
the fuzes used with the common-steel shell will fit the gas shell. 

SHRAPNEL. 

(Plate IV.) 

The shrapnel is a base charged shrapnel fitted with a combination 
fuze. The case is of forged steel with a solid base. The rotating 
band is forced into an annular groove cut in the case 1.9 inches from 
the base.^ The front or mouth of the case is closed by a steel head, 
screwed in and tapped to take the service 31-second or 45-second 
combination time and percussion fuze. The method of assembling 
the shrapnel to the cartridge case is the same as that described above 
for the common-steel shell. The bursting charge is composed of a 
charge of loose black powder (9.44 ounces). The bursting charge, 
thus arranged, is covered by a steel diaphragm. The diaphragm 
supports a steel central tube, which extends forward to the fuze, and 
thus affords a conduit for the flames from the fuze to the bursting- 
charge. At the lower end of the central tube a stopper consisting 
of a reaper cup is fitted to prevent the loose powder charge from get- 
ting into the tube. The shrapnel filling is composed of 793 bails, 
each approximately 212 grains in weight. The balls are approxi- 
mately 0.54 inch in diameter. The balls are poured around the cen- 
tral tubes and rest upon the steel diaphragm. The interstices con- 
tain a smoke-producing matrix of rosin. The matrix, in addition 
to serving as a smoke producer, also assists to prevent deformation 
of the lead balls. 

In action the case is not ruptured by the explosion of the bursting 
charge; the head is stripped and the balls are shot out of the case 
with an increase of velocity of about 275 feet per second. The re- 
maining velocity of the shrapnel at 9,700 yards is approximately 
892 feet per second, and the time of flight 31.6 seconds, so that at 
that range, with the increase of velocity due to the bursting charge, 
this shrapnel, with the 31-second fuze ; is an efficient projectile. The 
addition of the 45-second combination fuze makes the shrapnel 
effective to the extreme range of the gun. With fuze, the shrapnel 
weighs 60 pounds. 

FUZES. 

COMBINATION FUZES. ■ 

These are point fuzes for use with shrapnel. They combine time 
and percussion elements. Because they are set by turning a gradu- 
ated ring carrying part of the time train, they are known as ring or 
'dial" fuzes. They may be reset as often as necessary. The parts 
are made up for the most part from brass and bronze. 



22 

FRANKFORD ARSENAL 31-SECOND COMBINATION FUZE. 

(Plate V.) 

This fuze consists of the following parts, assembled as shown in 
Plate V: 

(a) Body. 

(6) Closing cap. _ 

(b 1 ) Vents in closing cap. 

(6 2 ) Safety wire. 

(c) Upper time train ring. < 

(c 1 ) Washer for graduated time-train ring felt cloth. 

d) Time train ring, graduated. 
d 1 ) Washer for body, felt cloth. 
d 2 ) Rotating pin. 

e) Concussion plunger. 
(e l ) Concussion resistance ring. 
(/) Firing pin. 

(g) Vent leading to upper time train. 

(h) Compressed powder pellet. 

(i) Upper time train, compressed powder. 

(j) Compressed powder pellet in vent leading to lower time 

train. 

(j 1 ) Compressed powder pellet in lower time train vent. 

k) Lower time train, compressed powder. 

I) Brass disk, locked in place. 

m) Compressed powder pellet in vent o. 

o) Vent leading to magazine. 

p) Powder magazine. 

q) Percussion plunger. 

(r) Percussion primer. 

Is) Vents leading from percussion primer to magazine. 

(u) Bottom closing screw. 

(v) Washer for closing screw, muslin. 

(w) Washer for closing screw. 

In the lower face of each ring a horseshoe-shaped annular groove 
is milled. Meal powder is compressed into these grooves under 
51,000 pounds pressure per square inch, forming the time train. 
The time train in both grooves totals 12.35 inches in length. 

The principal parts of the time element in this fuze are : The time 
or concussion plunger (e), the concussion resistance ring (e / ), the 
firing pin (/), the vent leading to the upper time train (g), the com- 
pressed powderpellet (h), the upper time train ({),_the compressed 
powder pellet in the vent(j), the lower time train (£), the com- 
pressed powder pellet (m) in the vent (o) leading to the powder 
magazine. 

The plunger (e) is cylindrical and contains the primer composition 
in a recess in its base. The concussion resistance ring (e / ) prevents 
contact of the primer and firing pin by supporting the weight of 
the plunger which rests upon it. The acceleration of the projectile 
during discharge causes the plunger, through inertia, to spread the 
ring and bring the primer into contact with the firing pin. Thus 
begun, the functions of the important parts are best explained by 



j 

CL 




s 



rt 



23 

the following description of the time action : Assume first the " zero " 
setting as shown in the figure ; the concussion plunger arms and fires 
its primer at the discharge of the gun. .The flame from the primer 
passes out through the vent (g) which is drilled through the walls 
of the concussion plunger chamber and is exactly opposite a hole 
in the inner surface of the upper time train at its farthest end. At 
the "zero" setting the vents are registered, the flame passing 
directly down vent ( j) to the beginning of time train (k), then through 
the vent (o) to the magazine (p), from which the flames are trans- 
mitted to the base charge of the shrapnel. 

Assuming any other setting, such as 12 seconds, the rotation of the 
graduated ring so that zero is 12 divisions from the datum mark, 
separates the vents (j) and (g), stopping direct access to the train (Jc) 
and forcing the flame to travel counterclockwise until it reaches 
the new position of vent (j), then pass down to train (k) and back, 
clockwise, to vent (o) where it ignites the powder pellet (m) and 
explodes the powder magazine (p) . The lower time train is graduated 
in a clockwise direction on its outer edge from to 31.6 

For the 31.6-second setting the vent (j) leading to the beginning 
of the lower time train is opposite the end of the upper time train 
and the end of the lower time train is opposite the vent (o) leading 
to the powder magazine. It will now be seen that the entire length 
of time train in both rings must be burned before the flame can reach 
the magazine (p) and burst the shrapnel. 

A safety setting is obtained by utilizing the solid surfaces of the 
upper and lower time train rings left between the ends of the annular 
grooves. This point is marked by a line on the outer edge of the 
movable time train and surmounted by an "S," and is located about 
halfway between the zero mark and the 31.6-second graduation. 
When this point is brought opposite the datum line, the vent (j) is 
rotated to beneath the solid metals separating the ends of the upper 
time train in the upper ring, while the vent leading to the powder 
magazine (p) is covered by the solid metal separating the ends of 
the lower time train in the lower ring. 

With the fuze set at safety, the upper time train may burn entirely 
out if the time plunger should be accidentally fired, without the 
flame reaching the magazine (p). The solid metal of the lower ring 
covering vent (o) gives additional safety in case of a gas or flame 
leakage. The safety setting is the one used to cause the shrapnel to 
burst on impact. 

] Washers (c) and (<?') are glued to the upper face of the graduated 
time ring and to the upper face of the flange of the fuze stock. Both 
surfaces are scored as shown to make the washers adhere firmly. 
The washers act as a gas check and prevent premature action of the 
fuze. 

The compressed pellet (/) in the vent leading from the outside 
to the beginning of the lower time train is to release the pressure of 
the gases of the burning train. Escape of the gases from both time 
trains is through the annular spaces, shown in the illustration, and out 
the vents {V) in the closing cap. 



24 

The percussion element of the fuze as shown in the plate consists 
of a centrifugal percussion plunger (q) and an ordinary percussion 
primer (r). The centrifugal plunger (q) is provided -with a slot to 
receive the firing pin, which is mounted on a fulcrum and kept in the 
unarmed position by two pins which fit in recesses on opposite sides 
of the plunger by the tension of the springs. These springs are 
designed to suit the velocity of rotation of the particular projectile in 
Avhich the fuze is used. Centrifugal force due to the rotation of the 
projectile forces the pins outward against the tension of the springs, 
releasing the firing pin, which is also rotated into its armed position 
by centrifugal force. Two spring housings hold the entire plunger 
and its housing away from the primer during handling, transportation, 
and flight. 

The system of vents through the walls of the fuze shown in figure 
2 conduct the flame from the percussion primer to the magazine (p). 

The bottom closing screw (v) closes the percussion plunger 
recess and keeps the powder in the magazine. The muslin washer 
(v)is shellaced and held by the brass washer (w). A projecting lip 
is crimped over the edge of the washer from the under edge of the 
bottom closing screw. 

These fuzes are assembled in shrapnel. For transportation in 
limbers and caissons, the fuze should always be set at the safety 
point. 

A hermetically sealed waterproof hood of thin brass is provided 
for the fuze. The hood should be stripped off before attempting to 
set the fuze. Remove the safety wire before setting the fuze, and 
replace the wire if the round is not fired. _ If the safety wire can not 
be replaced the round should not be earned in ammunition chests, 
or roughly handled, and should be fired at the next firing. 

BASE DETONATING FUZE. 

The base of the 60-pound shell is tapped for the medium caliber 
base detonating fuze, the percussion plunger of which is similar 
to that used in the combination fuze. Under no conditions should 
this fuze be disassembled when recovered in unexploded shell, as 
fatal accidents are known to have occurred from such action. 

ADAPTER AND BOOSTER CASING. MAEK II. 

For French 24/31 fuzes: To adapt the French type point detonating 
fuzes Mark III and Mark V to the 4.7 shell, an adapter embodying a 
high explosive booster is used which is shown in Plate VI. The 
adapter consists of a flanged steel collar, threaded on the outside 
with a standard thread to screw into the head of the shell up to the 
flange. The inner circumference below the flange is also threaded 
to receive the steel tube constituting the booster casing. 

Through the flanged section the collar is threaded to receive the 
French threading on the fuze stocks. A tubular fuze socket holder, 
of steel is fitted to the inside of the booster casing. It has an inner 
lip which supports the outer lip of the copper or brass fuze socket, 
which is passed through it and soldered fast. 






25 

In assembling, the lower end of the booster casing is filled with 
214 grains of T. N. T. under pressure of 5,000 pounds per square inch, 
followed by 214 grains of tetryl, which is packed up and around the 
fuze socket under pressure of 5,000 pounds to the square inch, and 
held in place by a felt washer. This washer encircles the fuze 
socket at its juncture with the fuze socket holder. 

Screwing the booster casing into the adapter plug brings the 
upper lip of the fuze holder tightly against the upper rim of the 
booster casing, holding the entire contents of the casing fast. 

The adapter and booster are now ready to be screwed into the 
shell. As the fuzes are never assembled to the shell until the round 
is about to be used, an adapter plug is supplied which acts as a 
protection against the entrance of foreign substance or moisture into 
the socket. It consists of a compressed felt washer held between 
an upper washer of tin and a lower washer of copper, both held 
together by a twisted wire link. This link is first passed over the 
circumference of a ring which acts as a handle and means of un- 
screwing the plug. 

ADAPTER AND BOOSTER CASING, MARK IV. 

For 4.7 gas shell: Owing to the necessity for a gas-tight joint in 
this shell, the booster casing is made of a single tube of steel and the 
adapter is tapered where threaded into the shell. The booster 
charge and method of assembly are identical with those of common 
steel shell, except that the fuze socket holder is held by a bushing 
threaded into the adapter collar. This bushing is threaded on the 
inside to take the thread on the French fuzes. 

POINT DETONATING FUZE I. A. L., MARK III. 

(Plate VII.) 

This fuze is designed to burst the shell before it can enter the 
ground. "I. A. L." signifies Instante Allonge Lefevre, or the in- 
stantaneous, elongated fuze of Lefevre design. ^ Its principal parts 
are: The body, the cap, the firing pin, firing-pin head, supporting 
washer, half rings, spiral, safety pin, percussion primer, upper deto- 
nator, and lower detonator. 

The action of the fuze is as follows: The rotation of the projectile 
causes the spiral to unwind, clue to centrifugal force acting on the 
weighted end. When the spiral flies off, the half rings accompany 
it. This arms the fuze by permitting the backward thrust of the 
pin on impact to fall directly on the safety pin. When the pin is 
bent the firing pin impinges on the percussion primer. The explo- 
sion of the primer in turn explodes the upper detonator. The flame 
from the upper detonator reaches the lower detonator, through the 
channel, exploding it and detonating the booster charge in the 
booster casing. These explosions follow in such rapid succession as 
to make the bursting of the shell practically simultaneous with the 
first impact of the firing-pin head. 



26 

POINT DETONATING FUZE, MARK V. 

(Plate vm.) 

This fuze is designed so that a slight change in its components in 
assembling makes it either a long or short delay action, or a non- 
delay action fuze. A double arming feature distinguishes this fuze 
from other types. 

The principal parts are: Fuze body (D), detonator (M), closing 
cap (A), firing pin (Z), head safety support (F / ), head safety spring 
(F), head plunger (C), head plunger casing (B), relay cup (Q), per- 
cussion plunger (W), percussion primer (Y), delay retard carrier (H), 
safety casing (TJ / ), arming casing (BO, arming spring (D'). 

In action, the head plunger (0), through its inertia, at the impulse 
of the propelling charge, compresses the spring (F) and engages the 
points of the casing (E) with the head safety support (F 7 ), locking 
them. The head plunger and head safety support are now free from 
pressure of the spring (F), and can either creep forward or move 
forward on impact so that the firing pin is exposed and the fuze 
armed. The arming casing (B 7 ), at the impulse of discharge, par- 
allels the action of the head plunger above described by pushing 
back the arming spring (D')- 

The sides of the arming casing (B'), disengage the prongs of the 
safety casing (TJ'), freeing the percussion plunger (W) for forward 
movement, while the prongs of the arming casing engage the collar 
on the side of the percussion plunger (W). The arming casing is 
thus held back exposing the percussion primer and completing the 
arming of the fuze. At impact, the percussion plunger (W) goes 
forward and is exploded by the firing pin (Z), the compressed black 
powder in the firing pin plug (A 7 ) ignites, the flames being communi- 
cated to the uncompressed black powder in the percussion plunger 
(X). This in turn ignites the delay charge in the delay retard car- 
rier (H) which consists of Army black powder compressed to about 
42,000 pounds to the square inch. The length of delay depends on 
the length of this compressed powder to be burned. The long delay 
is, approximately, 0.15 of a second; the short delay about 0.05 of a 
second. When the flame of the delay train reaches the quick match, 
it ignites the slightly faster burning powder in the relay cup (R), 
which explodes the 30 grains of fulminate of mercury in the de- 
tonator. This detonates the booster charge in the adapter and 
explodes the shell. 

For nondelay action the amount of compressed black powder in 
the percussion plunger is lengthened and the delay charge and 
quick match removed. This permits the flame to flash directly to 
the charge in the relay cup and to cause the explosion of the deto- 
nator as before. 

This latter action, while not used in the Mark V fuze, is utilized 
to create a Mark IV fuze similar to the Mark V and with which the 
artilleryman should be familiar. This fuze is a nondelay Mark V 
without the head arming feature. It arms at lower muzzle velocity 
than Mark V. 



PL^TEHS 




6 AMPLE MARKING 

FOR 75 MM. SHELL 

PACKING dOX. 



49877°— 18. (To face p. 27.) 



27 

IDENTIFYING PAINT MARKS ON DELAY ACTION FUZES. 

Distinguishing colors indicate the delay action of the fuzes used 
in 4.7-inch projectile as follows: Lcng delay Mark V fuzes have the 
head closing cap painted black, and the detonator socket painted 
violet. Short delay Mark V fuzes have the black head cap only. 
Nondelay action in Mark IV fuzes is indicated by the fact that the 
head closing plug is white. 

MARKING ON AMMUNITION PACKING BOXES. 

For quick and accurate identification, the 4.7-inch ammunition 
packing box is marked on top, on both sides and on both ends, as 
shown in Plate IX. 

Plate IX. 

The symbol marking identifies the type of ammunition instantly; 
when familiarized, the smaller, more explicit marking is a check 
and teaches the significance of the symbols, also giving quantities. 
Black only is the color used in marking these boxes. The marking 
follows a fixed system. The 75-mm. marking is shown here. By 
substituting 4.7 for 75 the same marking covers the 4.7-inch gun, as 
both use fixed ammunition. 

The type of cartridge or projectile shown to the right of the ord- 
nance escutcheon (side view) is always representative of the kind 
contained, whether separate loading, fuzed, or unfuzed, etc. The 
size of the piece, whether in inches or millimeters, always appears 
in the same place, as does also the lettering indicating (G in this case) 
whether ammunition is for gun, howitzer, anti-aircraft gun, etc. 
The lot number follows the word ' ' Lot " and should always be referred 
to in the reports concerning the failure of ammunition to function 
properly. 

Practically the same marking appears on the ends with the excep- 
tion of a representation of the round of ammunition. The place 
of packing and the ordnance inspector's stamp are always placed 
on the upper left-hand corner of the top. Following downward, is 
the United States number of the individual box and the total weight 
of the box, together with the proper invoice number, and the date 
of invoice. Boxes in any invoice are numbered from No. 1 up to the 
total number of boxes the invoice contains. Finally, the destina- 
tion for shipment is given. 

MARKING ON FUZE PACKING BOXES. 

High-explosive shell requiring a booster can not safely be shipped, 
fuzed. Special packing boxes are provided for each type of fuze. 
They are marked on the top, sides, and both ends. The marking 
follows a fixed system similar to that used on ammunition boxes. 

Ordnance inspector's stamp and place of packing appear on left 
top corner of case. The sentence, ^'Detonating fuzes; handle care- 
fully, v appears next to conform with interstate commerce require- 
ments. The United States number, weight, number of invoice and 
date follow in order. Boxes in any invoice are numbered from No. 1 



28 

to the total number of boxes the invoice contains, for reference. The 
destination completes the marking of the top. The side marking 
consists of one line giving quantity, whether base or point detonating, 
and the mark or number by which the fuze is known. Under this 
line is given length of delay — whether non, short, or long delay — and 
the lot number, to be used in reporting all cases of nonfunctioning 
fuzes. Underneath is shown the ordnance escutcheon. This mark- 
ing is repeated on a smaller scale on both ends of the box. 

WEIGHT MARKINGS ON SHELL. 

So that variations in weight of loaded shell can be allowed for in 
computing firing data, 4.7 shells are classified by weight into three 
zones. These zones are indicated by punch marks, as follows: 

Marks. 
43 pounds up to and including 43 pounds 11 ounces 1 

43 pounds 11 ounces up to and including 44 pounds 6 ounces . . 2 

44 pounds 6 ounces up to and including 45 pounds 1 ounce 3 

The marks are placed about 0.5 inch in rear of the bourrelet and 
spaced . 5 inch apart. They should average about . 1 inch in diam - 
eter and are punched deep enough to be felt and counted by sense 
of touch, enabling artillerymen to recognize weight of projectiles 
during night firing. Each punch mark has a square of black paint 
stenciled over it for identifying weight zones by sight. 

Weight zones indicated by the marks are for shell containing burst- 
ing charge, adapter and booster charge, but without fuze. Mark III 
fuzes add 15 ounces to the shell's loaded weight. Mark V fuzes add 
6 ounces. Shrapnel varies but 1 per cent in weight and has no 
weight zones. 

SUBCALIBER AND DRILL CARTRIDGE KIT. 

The subcaliber and drill cartridge kit consists of: 
3 drill cartridges, 1 extra base. J 1 bristle cleaning brush. 



1 subcaliber cartridge, 1 extra 
base. 

2 ejector springs. 
2 ejector spring screws. 
1 cleaning rod. 
1 eyepiece. 
1 extension piece. 

One subcaliber and drill cartridge kit is issued for each giu 



1 pin wrench. 
1 storage chest. 
6 rotating pins. 

1 graduated ring with felt washer. 
4 ring screws. 

2 closing cap set screws. 
6 stop pins. 



ALLOWANCE OF AMMUNITION. 

Shell and shrapnel ammunition is issued by the Ordnance Depart- 
ment in boxes containing 2 rounds each. The allowance of ammuni- 
tion for the instruction of field artillery is prescribed from time to 
time in War Department orders. These orders give full information 
as to the allowance of fixed, subcaliber, or other ammunition for 
4.7-inch guns, also drill cartridges and revolvers -with instructions for 
their care. 



29 

CARE OF CARTRIDGE CASES. 

As soon after firing as practicable the fired primers should be 
removed from the cartridge case by means of the decapping tool 
furnished with the reloading oufit. The case should be thoroughly- 
washed in a strong solution of lye or soft soap to remove all powder 
residue. It should then be thoroughly rinsed and dried and lightly 
oiled. If the cartridge cases are carefully cleaned and washed im- 
mediately after firing, not only will less labor be required but the 
life of the cases will be greatly prolonged. 

A good solution for washing cartridge cases may be prepared by 
using ingredients in the following proportions: 1 gallon of water, 2\ 
ounces soft soap, 5 J ounces soda. 

The mixture should be boiled and stirred until the ingredients 
are entirely dissolved. In washing cartridge cases this solution 
should be used hot and in sufficient quantity to completely im- 
merse the cases. 

Primers that misfire should be returned with the cases to the 
ordnance establishment prescribed in the target-practice order. 

RESIZING OF CARTRIDGE CASES. 

The resizing of 4.7-inch cartridge cases that have become deformed 
in sendee is done at designated ordnance establishments. 

RANGE TABLES. 

Owing to the necessity for range tables for different weights of pro- 
jectile it is impracticable to include them in the handbook. Com- 
plete range tables for the 4.7-inch gun will be issued separately, 
covering 80-pound projectiles, 45-pound shell, and giving time of 
burning of 31 and 45 second combination fuzes. 

THE HAND-FUZE SETTER, MODEL OF 1913. 

(Plate X.) 

The hand-fuze setter provided for the 4.7-inch gun consists prin- 
cipally of an aluminum case having a serrated rim forming a handle 
for turning; a range ring which has graduations for the 31-second fuze 
on one side, and graduations for the 45-second fuze on the reverse 
side and is mounted on the range-ring carrier, which is operated by 
the knob on the range worm. A corrector scale mounted on the cor- 
rector-scale support, which is operated by the knob on the corrector 
worm, and a guide plate which rests on the projectile. 

A slot is cut in the range-ring carrier, which engages with the pin 
on the graduated time train ring of the fuze. A stop pin is attached 
to the corrector-scale support and engages with the stop pin body of 
the fuze to limit the motion of the fuze setter. The range- worm and 
corrector worm are mounted eccentrically in the range-worm case 
and the corrector- worm case. Upon rotation this provides an ad- 



30 

justnient to accommodate slight variations in machine operations* 
and to take up for wear between the teeth of the worms and gears. 

The range- worm adjusting screw and the corrector- worm adjusting 
screw have fiber washers fitted in the end, which bear on the collar 
of the range and corrector worms for taking up the end motion and 
to provide sufficient friction to resist accidental turning. Clamp 
plugs are provided for locking the range and corrector worm caset-- 
and the range worm and corrector-worm adjusting screws. 

OPERATION. 

Bring the number of meters of range desired to register with the 
datum line by turning the range worm till the proper index of the 
range and the datum line coincide. 

Turn the knob of the corrector worm until the index on the case 
registers with the line on the corrector scale, which indicates the 
desired correction for height of burst. 

To set a fuze, remove the water-proof cap and safety wire. Place 
the hand fuze setter over the fuze and turn until the slot in the 
range ring carrier engages with the pin on the graduated time train 
ring of the fuze. The base plate and the upper part of the range 
ring carrier will then bear firmly on theprojectile. Then turn the 
fuze setter in a clockwise direction as indicated by the arrow on 
the top of the case until the stop pin on the corrector scale support 
engages with the stop pin on the fuze and further motion is prevented. 

An index to register with a line on the fuze to indicate when the 
stop pin on the fuze and fuze setter are in contact is attached to 
the corrector scale. 

ADAPTABILITY TO OTHER GUNS. 

This fuze setter is adaptable to all projectiles using the 31-second 
and 45-second combination fuzes by using suitable range ring cor- 
rector scale, guide plate, and index bar. The corrector scale for 
guns has 60 graduations, 30 being the normal position. The guide 
plates are suitably marked for the projectile to which they are 
fitted. The range rings and corrector scales are marked with the 
name of the gun. 

4.7-INCH GUN DRILL CARTRIDGE. 

The drill cartridge is a dummy cartridge^ f or use in drilling can- 
noneers in the service of the gun. The principal parts are: Wood 
body, bronze base, body guard, stop pin, graduated ring, point nut, 
and bolt extending through entire length. It is the shape of the 
service shrapnel ammunition, and is fitted at the point with a mov- 
able ring graduated the same as the ring upon the Frankford Arsenal 
combination fuze. This arrangement is for the instruction of 
cannoneers in fuze setting. 



Class V, section 5. 



31 

THE RELOADING AND CLEANING OUTFIT. 

This outfit consists of the following parts and is furnished each 
battery and to each post where a saluting gun is kept: 

Primer inserting press, large. 

Bushing. 

Powder measure, saluting. 

Decapping tool, with guide. 

Cleaning brush. 

Hammer. 

Case holder. 

Case holder stand. 

Storage chest. 

The bushing is used in the primer inserting press for the insertion 
of new primers.^ The decapping tool and case holder and stand are 
used for removing exploded primers from the cartridge cases. A 
light blow on the rod with a piece of wood or the bronze hammer 
generally removes the primer. 

A powder measure to suit the saluting charge for the gun is fur- 
nished, and when level full holds the required charge. The cleaning 
brush is furnished for cleaning the cartridge cases after they have 
been used and should be ordered to suit the size of the case for which 
intended. 

MISFIRES AND HANGFIRES. 

"Misfires" and "hangfires" are of exceedingly rare occurrence 
with this ammunition. In case of the failure of the cartridge to 
fire when the trigger is pulled, the breechblock should not be opened 
until after the expiration of at least one minute. The gun may be 
immediately recocked without opening the breech mechanism and 
the cartridge tried again. Defective cartridges should be reported 
to the armament officer. 

THE 4.7-INCH GUN CARRIAGE, MODEL OF 1906. 

WEIGHTS, PRINCIPAL DIMENSIONS, ETC. 

Weight of carriage, complete pounds. . 5, 320 

Weight of gun and carriage, complete do 8, 068 

Weight of gun and carriage on limber, gun in battery . . do 312 

Weight of gun and carriage on limber, gun in traveling posi- 
tion pounds. . 1, 282 

Diameter of wheel inches. . 61 

Width of wheel (rubber tired) do 6 

Length of recoil of gun on carriage do 70 

Height of axis on gun do 51. 59 

Height of line of sight do 53. 92 

Length of sight radius do 36. 75 

Maximum angle of elevation (gun on carriage) degrees. . 15 

Maximum angle of depression (gun on carriage) do 5 

Amount of traverse of gun on carriage milliemes. . 140 

Free height of spring column feet. . 12. 5 



32 



NOMENCLATURE OP PARTS. 

[Details marked * apply to carriages with serial numbers 1 to 40, inclusive, only 
Details marked f apply to carriages with serial numbers above 40 only.] 



Name of part. 



Location, etc. 



Property 
classifica- 
tion. 



Class. 



Cradle, complete, including: 
Cradle, including — 

Cradle band, front 

Cradle band, rear 

Trunnion band 

Spring cylinder, right . 
Spring cylinder, left. . . 
Spring cylinder, rein- 
force, right. 
Spring cylinder, rein- 
force, left. 
Spring cylinder head, 

right. 
Spring cylinder head. 

left. 
Cradle rails, 1 right, 1 

left. 
Cradle rail liner, top, 

1 right, 1 left. 
Cradle rail liner, bot- 
tom, 1 right, 1 left. 
Recoil cylinder lock, 
complete, includ- 
ing— 

Lock bracket 

Lock catch 

Lock pin 

0.125 by 1.5 split 
pin. 
Swing bolt forks 



Front connections for cylinders. . 
Hear connections for cylinders... 
Pivots cradle in pintle yoke 



On rear end of spring cvlinder, 

right. 
On rear end of spring cylinder, 

left. 
In rear end of spring cylinder, 

right. 
In rear end of spring cylinder, 

left. 
Riveted to bands and spring 

cylinders. 
Riveted to cradle rails at top 

Riveted to cradle rails at bottom. 



Riveted to cradle band, front . 
Pinned to bracket 



Shoulder guard 
bracket. 

Guide bracket 

Guide 

Firing handle bracket. 

Firing handle bracket 
reinforce. 

Front sight bracket 
support. 

Rear sight bracket 
support. 

Range quadrant fas- 
tening. 

Elevating bevel gear 
stop. 

Cylinder cover hinges 



Spring cylinder cover 

Swing bolts with pins and 
split pins. 



Riveted to spring cylinders at 
front. 

Riveted to spring cylinder re- 
inforce, left. 

Riveted to spring cylinder, right. 

Riveted to guide bracket 

Riveted to spring cylinder re- 
inforce, right. 

Riveted to firing handle bracket. 



[Rive ted to spring cylinder, left. . 

Riveted to spring cylinder, right . 

Shrunk on cradle band, rear 

Riveted to spring cylinders at 

front. 
Bolted to front end of cylinders. . 



IV 



33 



t Nomenclature of parts— Continued. 



Name of part. 



Cradle, complete, including 
Continued. 

Extension rail pin 

Shoulder guard pin 

Shoulder guard 



Recoil indicator . 



Extension rail plunger 

Extension rail plunger 

ring. 
Extension rail plunger 

spring. 
Extension rail, complete, 
including — 
Extension rail body . . 
Extension rail liners, 

1 right, 1 left. 
Extension rail bearing 
plates, 1 right, 1 left. 
Extension rail top 

plate. 
Extension rail dia- 
phragm. 

Latch base 

Latch plunger 

Latch spring 

Plunger ring 

Extension rail bolts 

and nuts. 
Extension rail bolt 

pins. 
Extension rail body . . 
Extension rail bear- 
ings, 1 right, 1 left. 
Extension rail separa- 
tor. 
Extension rail separa- 
tor rivet. 
Extension rail bracket 
Extension rail latch 
socket. 

Extension rail pin 

Spring cylinder covers 

Dust guard 



Location, etc. 



Pins rail to spring cylinder cover , 



Pinned to bracket on spring cyl- 
der, left. 

Slides in guide on spring cylin- 
der, right. 

Secures rail to cover 



Secured to spring cylinder cover. 
Riveted to rail body 



Riveted to outside of rail body 

Riveted to rail body 

Riveted in rear end of bodv . . 



Riveted to bottom of rail. 
In latch base 



Secure rail to cradle band, front. 
Secure bolts to rail bracket 



Bolted to cradle band, front . 
Riveted to sides of body 



Riveted to rear end of body . 
Riveted to spring cylinders . 



Property 
classifica- 
tion. 



Class. 



Sec- 
tion. 



Dust guard pads 

Button head cap screws. . 
Recoil indicator throw 
Reooil indicator throw I 
pins. 

49877° — IS 3 



Secures cylinder cover and rail 
Pinned to front ends of cylinders . 
On extension rail between clips I 
on gun. 

Pinned to dust guard ! 

Secure dust guard i 

Pinned to dust guard I 



rv 



34 



Nomenclature of parts — Continued. 



Name of part. 



Location, etc. 



Property 
classifica- 
tion. 



Class. 



Cradle, complete, including— 
Continued. 
Recoil and counterrecoil 
arrangement, includ- 
ing— 
Recoil cylinder, com- 
plete, i ncluding— 
Recoil cylinder... 

Cylinder head 

Cylinder gaskets. . 

Stuffing box 

Stuffing box gland 
Rings, Garlock 
hydraulic wa- 
terproof packing. 
Filling and drain 
plugs. 

Gaskets 

Filling and drain 
plugs. 

Gaskets 

Piston rod , 

Piston 

Piston rod nut 

Counterrecoil buffer . . 

Counterrecoil buffer 
nut. 

Outer counterrecoil 
springs. 

Middle counterrecoil 
springs. 

Inner counterrecoil 
springs. 

Spring stirrups, outer 

Spring stirrups, inner 

Spring stirrup flanges, 
outer. 

Spring stirrup flanges, 
inner. 

Spring stirrup heads, 
outer. 

Spring stirrup heads, 
inner. 

Outer stirrup rein- 
forces, front. 

Outer stirrup rein- 
forces, rear. 

Inner stirrup rein- 
forces, front. 

Inner stirrup rein- 
forces, rear. 

Spring separators, 
outer. 



In cradle bands between spring 

cylinders. 
On'front end of recoil cylinder. . 
Oil-tight seat for cylinder head . . 
On rear end of recoil cylinder. . . 
In end of stuffing box 



In cylinder head and stuffing 

box. 

Under olugs 

In cylinder head and stuffing 

box. 

Under filling and drain plugs 

In cylinder 

On front end of piston rod 

Secures rod to gun lug and 

spring rod yoke. 

In front end of piston rod 

Secures buffer to cylinder head. . 

Assembled in spring cylinders.. . 

In spring stirrups, outer 

In spring stirrups, inner 



Connect outer and middle springs 
Connect middle and inner springs 
On front end of spring stirrup, 

outer. 
On front end of spring stirrup, 

inner. 
On rear end of spring stirrup, 

outer. 
L On rear end of spring stirrup, 

inner. 
Secures flange to spring stirrup, 

outer. 
Secures head to spring stirrup, 

outer. 
Secures flange to spring stirrup, 

inner. 
Secures head to spring stirrup, 

inner. 
Between outer springs 



35 

Nomenclature of parts — Continued. 



Name of part. 



Location, etc. 



Property 

classifica- 
tion. 



Class. 



Sec- 
tion. 



Cradle, complete, including— 
Continued. 
Recoil and counterrecoil 
arrangement, includ- 
ing — Continued. 
Spring separators, in- 
termediate. 
Spring separators, in- 
ner. 

Spring rods 

Spring rod flanges 

Spring rod plugs and 
nuts. 

Spring rod keys 

Spring rod yoke 

Firing mechanism, complete, 
including— 
Firing shaft 



Between middle springs. 
Between inner springs . . 



In inner springs 

On front ends of rods. 
On rear ends of rods. . 



Firing handle 

Shaft trip collar 

Shaft retaining collar 

Trip collar pin 

Shaft return spring 

Handle return spring 

Trip latch plunger 

Trip latch 

Triplatch pin 

Trip latch spring 

Adjusting screw 

Pintle yoke, complete, in- 
cluding— 
Pintle yoke, with 4 handy 

oilers. 
Trunnion bearing liners 

with 6 screws. 
Bolts and nuts 



Seated in plugs 

Connects spring rods and gun 



Assembled in firing handle 
bracket. 

On shaft 

do 

....do 



In firing handle bracket. 
do 



In firing handle 

On end of plunger 

Pins plunger in latch. 



In firing handle bracket. 



Supports the gun at the trun- 
nion band. 



Trunnion caps, with pins 
and handy oilers. 

Trunnion cap bolts 

Pintle bearing, complete, in- 
cluding— 

Pintle bearing 

Pintle bearing liner 

Bolts and nuts 

Trail tie bolt and nut 

Axle 

Trail, complete, including— 

Flasks, 1 right, 1 left 

Axle bearings, 1 right, 1 

left. 
Axle bearing bolts and 

nuts. 
Traversing transom, front . 



Secure pintle yoke to traversing 

bracket. 
Cap over trunnions 



On axle between axle bearings. 

Tn pi ntle . , 

Secure pintle bearing to trail . . . 
....do 



Form sides of trail 

Riveted to front end of flasks. . . 



Clamp bearings to axle 

First, in trail, riveted to flasks. 



IV 



36 



Nomenclature of parts — Continued. 



No. 



Name of part. 



Property- 
classifica- 
tion. 



Location, etc. 



"la-ss. 



Sec- 



Trail, complete, including— 
Continued. 

Traversing transom liner, 
front. 

Traversing transom, rear. . 

Traversing transom liner, 
rear. 

Traversing transom 
bracket. 

Tool box front transom. . . 

Tool box rear transom 

Tool box top plate 

Fastener (female) (for 
extension rail carrier). 

Hinge (for extension rail 
carrier). 

Tool box cover plate 

Name plate 

Tool box bottom plate 

Tool box, bottom hole, 
cover. 

Trail cover plate 

Cover plate front liner 

Cover plate rear liner 

Trail end reinforce plate . . 

Spade brackets, 1 right, 
1 left. 

Spade key bracket 

Seat supports, 1 right, 1 
left. 

Seats 

Cover hinges 

Tool box fastening, com- 
plete, includes— 

Clips 

Eyes 

Stops 

Handle 

Lock eye 

Chain rivet 

Yale lock, No. 840, with 
bolt snap and chain. 

Traveling lock cover fas- 
tener, complete. 

Traveling lock cover plate. 

Chain rivet 



Traveling lock cover pin. 

Traveling lock cover chain 

Sponge stop 

Sponge staff fastening 

Sponge staff hasp 

Hinge pin , 

Bolt with 0.135 twist coil 
chain and ring. 



Bearing surface on traversing \ 

transom, front. 
Second, in trail, riveted to flasks . j 
.Bearing surface on traversing i 

transom bracket. 
On traversing transom, rear . . 



Third, in trail, riveted to flasks 
Fourth, in trail 

Riveted to flasks and transom. 
Riveted to tool box rear transom . 

Riveted to trail cover plate. . . 



Hinged to tool box top plate. . . 

On tool box top plate 

F orms floor of tobl box 

Riveted to tool box bottom plate 



Top of lower trail 

\ Reinforce trail cover plate at 
/ traveling lock. 

Inside lower trail 

Riveted to flasks and trail cover 
plate. 

Riveted to lower end of trail. . . 

Riveted to flasks 



On supports at side of trail. 
On cover plates 



On tool box cover plate . 
Riveted to transom 



Riveted to tool box rear transom 
On trail cover plate 



Hinged to trail cover plate 

Riveted to traveling lock cover 

plate. 
Fastens traveling lock cover 

plate. 

Secures the pin 

On right flask 



On right flask of trail. 



IV 



37 

Nomenclature of parts — Continued. 



Name of part. 



Trail, complete, including— 
Continued. 
Sponge staff double fas- 
tening. 
Sponge staff double hasp. 

Hinge pin 

Bolt with 0.135 twist coil 

chain and ring. 

Sponge staff socket 

Bar and sponge staff 

socket. 

Liners (wheel guards) 

Liner screws(wheel guard) 
Maneuvering bar support . 
Maneuvering bar support 

pins. 

Fastening lever 

Fastening lever pin 

Fastening spring 

Maneuvering bar stop 

Trail handles, 2 short, 2 

long. 
Trail prop brackets, 1 

right, 1 left. 
Trail prop stops, 1 right, 

1 left. 

Prop chain bracket 

Prop hook button 

Azimuth scale bracket 

Azimuth scale strip.. 

Traveling lock, complete, 

mcluding — 
Traveling lock frame . . 

Traveling lock legs 

Lock pins 

Leg prop 

Lock bolt 

Lock bolt sleeve 

Lock bolt nut 

Lunette transom 

Lunette transom bushing . 
Lunette transom rivets . . .- 
Lunette trail reinforce, 1 

right, 1 left. 
Elevating and traversing 

lock lever guide. 
Elevating and traversing 

lock lever fastening. 
Spade, Complete, including— 

Spade frame 

Spade braces, 1 right, 1 

left. 

Float 

Floats, l right, 1 left 



Location, etc. 



On left side of trail. 



On right side. 
On left side . . 



On sponge staff sockets. 



Riveted to left flask . 



Pinned in support. ., 

Secures spring 

Pinned in lever 

Riveted to left flask. 
Riveted to flasks 



.do. 



Riveted to bottom flange of left 

flask. 
Riveted to bottom flanges flask . 

On right flask 

Riveted to left flask 

On bracket 



Property- 
classifica- 
tion. 



Class. 



Sec- 
tion. 



Riveted to flasks 

Hinged in traveling lock frame ! 



Supports one traveling lock le£ 
Secures gun to traveling lock. . 



Riveted to lower ends of flasks . 
In lunette transom 



Riveted to trail flasks 

Riveted to tool box top plate. . . 
Riveted to left trail flask 



Interior framework of spade. 



Riveted to spade frame . 
— do 



IV 



38 

Nomenclature of parts — Continued. 



Name of part. 



Location, etc. 



Property 
classifica- 
tion. 



Sec- 
tion. 



Spade, complete, including— 
Continued. 

Spade edge 

Spade points 

Spade braces, 1 right, 1 
left. 

Bearing plates, 1 right, 1 
left. 

Spade plate 

Spade reinforce 

Spade key, complete 

Spade pin, with nut 

Spade, center bearings, 1 
right, 1 left. 

Spade, rear bearings, 1 
right, 1 left. 
Handspikes, complete, in- 
cluding— 

Handspike webs, 1 right, 
1 left. 

Lower bands 

Middle bands 

Tips 

Handspike bodies, 2 in- 
ner, 2 outer. 

Chain eye 

Trail prop, complete, includ- 

Prop tubes 

Prop foot 

Prop braces 

Prop eyes, with pins 

Trail prop chain, complete, 
including — 

Prop chain 

Prop hook 

Prop chain swivel with 
pin. 
Extension rail carrier, com- 
plete , including— 

Bottom plate 

Bed 

Stop 

Hanger pin 

Hanger 

Fastener (male) 

Pin, including body, 
spring, head, and rivet. 

Chain 

Chain rings 

Catch 

Catch support 

Catch spring 

Catch pin 



Forms point of spade. 
Riveted to si 



and frame 



Riveted to floats. 
Riveted to floats and frame. 



Riveted to float 

Braces spade edge 

Locks spades in position. 

Hinges spade to trail 

Riveted to spade braces. 



Riveted to spade brace and f rame. 



Pinned to spade. 



On left handspike body . 
Hinged under trail 



IV 



Riveted to trail bottom plate. . 



Suspends carrier from hinge. . 
Riveted to trail bottom plate. 
Hinge pin in fasteners 



Secures pin 

Secures extension rail to bed . 



39 



Nomenclature of parts — Continued. 



Name of part. 



Elevating mechanism, com- 
plete , including — 
Elevating gear bracket 
with 2 handy oilers. 

Bu shings .". , 

Elevating screw cover — 

Elevating screw cover 

with split pin. 
Elevating screw cover 

springs. 
Outer elevating screw. . . . 

Inner elevating screw 

Elevating pin 



Elevating yoke sides, 1 

right, 1 left. 
Elevating yoke transom 

with 1 spring cover, 

No. 1. 
Elevating yoke bushings . 
Bolts and nuts (8 short, 2 

long). 
Elevating bevel gear with 

pins. 

Keys 

Elevating bevel gear lug. . 
Elevating pinion shafts 

with 2 nuts. 
Elevating bevel pinions . . 
Elevating handwheels, 

complete, including — 

Wheel bodies 

Counterbalances 

Instruction plates. . . . 



Spindles. 
3!e< 



Sleeves 

Reinforce pieces 

Hubs....: 

Traversing mechanism, com- 
plete, including— 
Traversing bracket with 

1-spring cover, No. 1. 

Traversing yoke 

Bolts and nuts, 2 short, 1 

long. 

Azimuth pointer 

Traversing screw bracket. 
Bolts and nuts, 2 long, 1 

short. 
Traversing screw bracket 

cap. 

Bolts and nuts 

Traversing screw bearing 

with 1 handy oiler. 



Location, etc. 



Trunnioned in elevating yoke 

sides. 

Forced in bracket 

Closes lower end of elevating gear 

bracket. 
do 



Assembles inner screw to rear 
cradle band. 

Bolted to traversing bracket 
\ to form frame for elevating 
mechanism. 

In elevating side yokes 



Assembled in bracket 



Riveted toelevatingbcvelgear. . 

do 

Assembled in bracket 



Pinned to inner ends of shafts . 



On outside ends of shafts. 



Bolted to pintle yoke . 



On traversing bracket. 
Bolted to left flask.... 



Property 
classifica- 
tion. 



Class. 



Sec- 
tion. 



IV 



Bolted to bracket . 



Swivels in traversing screw 
bracket. 



40 

Nomenclature of pvrts — Continued. 



No.] 



Name of part. 



Location, etc. 



Property 

classifica- 

tion. 



Sec- 
tion. 



Traversing mechanism, com- 
plete, including — Contd. 
Traversing screw, with 1 

nut. 
Traversing nut with 

handy oiler .- 
Traversing handwheel, 
complete, including — 

Wheel body 

Counterbalance 

Instruction plate 

Spindle 

Sleeve 

Reinforce piece . . 

Hub 

Elevating and traversing lock, 
complete, including— 
Lock bar bearing, 1 right, 

Heft. 
Bearing braces, 1 right, 1 
left. 

Lock bolt casing 

Bolts and nuts, 2 long, 2 
short. 

Lo ck bar 

Lock bar lever 

Lever handle 

Handle bushing 

Handle plunger 

Plunger spring 

Lock bolt 

Lock bolt end 

Link 

Link pins, 1 long, 1 short. 
Elevating and traversing 
lock spring. 

Lever. 

Fulcrum pin 

Band brake mechanism,, com- 
plete, including — 

Brake bands 

Brake band ends, lower, 

1 right, Heft. 
Brake band ends, upper, 
1 right, Heft. 

Brake band linings 

Brake cranks 

Pin t^pe A .610 by 2.125 
(A=156). 

Brake drums 

Brake lever 

Brake lever catch 

Brake lever hinges 

Pin t^ v pe A .734 by 5.3 
(A=4.55). 



Assembled in bearing and nut... 
Swivels in traversing yoke 



On end of traversing screv 



Riveted to trail flasks . . . 
do 

Bolted to trail transoms. 



Assembled in lock bar bearings. 

On lock bar 

On lock bar lever 

In handle 



IV 



In lock bolt casing 

Pinned to lock bolt end. . . 

In lock bolt casing 

Pinned to lock bolt casing. 



Riveted to brake band ends 

Pinned to brake cranks . 

Pinned to adjusting bolts sleeve. 

Riveted to brake bands 

On brake shaft 



Bolted to wheels 

Hinged to brake shaft. . 
Riveted to brake lever. 
On brake shaft 



41 

Nomenclature of parts — Continued . 



Name of part; 



Location, etc. 



Band brake mechanism, com- 
plete, including— Contd. 
Split piri> 0.25 by 2.75 ..... 

Brake lever sleeve 

Split pin, 0.25 by 2.75.... 

Brake lever spring 

; Brake lever spring 

bracket. ■» 

Brake shaft 

Brake shaft brackets, 1 

right, Heft. 

0.375 hand oilers 

0.75 by 1.46 bolts 

0.75 by 5.062 bolts.. 

0.75 crown nuts 

Bushings (brake shaft 

bracket), 2 right, 2 left. 
Bronze pins 0.125 by 0.6S7 
Segment rack (brake) 



Adjusting bolt bushings. . 

Adjusting bolt eyes 

Adjusting bolt sleeve 

Band clips 

0.5 by 0.75 top bolts 

0.5 lock washers 

Band guides 

Brake shaft washer 

Tire brake mechanism, com- 
plete, including — 
Brake shaft bracket, right, 

with 1 handv oiler. 
Brake shaft bracket, left, 

with 1 handy oiler. 

Bushings 

Bolts and nuts 

Bolts and nuts 

Segment rack 



Bolts and nuts 

Brake shaft. ....;... 

Brake cranks and nuts 

and pins. 

Brake crank washers 

Brake lever hinge, with 

pin. 

Brake lever. . . 

Brake lever spring bracket 

Brake lever catch 

Brake lever spring ... 

Brake beams . . : . 

Brake beam hinge pins. .'. 

Brake shoes 

Brake shoe pins 



Pinned to brake shaft . 



Assembled in brake lever hinges . 
Riveted to brake leA r er 



Assembled in brackets 
Keyed and clamped to axle . 



On brackets. 



Property 
classifica- 
tion. 



Class. 



Sec- 
tion. 



Clamp brackets to axle 

Through brackets and shield. 
In brackets 



Bolted to right brake shaft 

bracket. 
On brake shaft 

On adjusting bolt bushings. 

Screw to adjusting bolt e; es 

Bolted to brake shaft brackets. . 



Riveted to bands. 



Keyed to axle . 



In brackets 

Clamp brackets to axle 

Through brackets and shield . . . 
Bolted" to brake shaft bracket, 
right. 



Assembled in brackets . 
On brake shaft 



On brake shaft 

Hinged to brake shaft 

►Riveted to brake lever 

Assembled in brake lever hinge. 
Hinged to pintle bearing 

On ends of brake beams 



42 



Nomenclature of parts — Continued. 



No. 


Name of part. 


Location, etc. 


Property 
classifica- 
tion. 




Class. 


Sec- 
tion. 


2 


Tire brake mechanism, com- 
plete, including — Contd. 
Brake rods, complete, in- 
cluding— 
Brake rods 


Secured to brake beams and 
brake cranks. » 

Equalize pressure on brako shoes. 

Secure rod to brake beams 

Seated in brake rod 


IV 




2 
2 
2 
2 

2 
2 
2 

?, 


Brake rod springs 

Brake spring cover . . . 

Brake rod ends 

Brake spring cover 

ends. 
Brake rod bushings. . . 
0.25 by 3.5 split pins.. 

Brake rod pins 

Brake rod keys 

Shield, complete, including— 
Top shield, complete, in- 
cluding— 
Top shield 




1 
1 

1 






2 

4 


Top shield braces 

Top shield hinges, up- 
per half, with pins. 

Top shield fastenings 
with pins. 

Shutter, panoramic 
sight port. 

Hinge pin 


Locktopshieldincitherposition. 
Riveted to top shield at bottom . . 

Riveted to top shield 




1 
1 


Over panoramic sight port 

Secures shutter 




4 


Hinges, sight port 

shutter. 
Fillers, shutter hinge . 


Riveted to shield and shutter. . . 


3 


*1 


Shutter latch base." . . 
Shutter latch plunger. 
Shutter latch spring. . 


Riveted to top shield 




*1 






*1 






tl 


Shutter support 

Main shield, complete, in- 
cluding— 
Main shield, right 


Riveted to shutter 




1 
1 






1 


Main shield, left 






1 


Hood 


Riveted to main shield 




«* 


Main shield side pieces, 
1 right, 1 left. 


Bolted to shield 




6 






? 


Main shield braces, 

upper end. 
Main shield braces, 

lower end, 1 right, 1 

left. 
Main shield brace 

tubes. 
Bolts and nuts, 2 

short . 2 long. 
Top shield brackets... 
Top shield brace pins. 


Braces shield to trail 




? 






? 






4 


Secure shield braces to shield 

and trail. 
Riveted to main shield 




2 


Through top shield brace and 
bracket. 





43 



Nomenclature of parts — Continued. 



Name of part. 



Location, etc. 



Property 
classic ca- 
tion. 



Class. 



Sec- 
tion. 



Shield, complete, including— 
Continued. 
Main shield, complete, in- 
cluding — Continu ed . 
Top shield brace pin 
chains, complete, 
including— 

Chains 

End links 

Rings 

Top shield hinges, 

lower half. 
Apron hinges, upper 

half, with pins. 
Shutter, peep sight 

Hinge pin 

Hinges, peep sight 

port shutter. 
Fillers, shutter hinge . 

Shutter latch 

Shutter latch bracket. 
Apron, complete, includ- 
ing— 

Apron 

Apron hinges, lower 

half. 
Apron latch staples. . . 
Apron latches, complete, in- 
cluding — 
Apron latch bodies 



•Fastened to top shield brackets. 

•Riveted to main shield 

Over peep sight port 



Riveted to shield and shutter. 
Riveted to to"} shield 



Riveted to apron. 
do 



Apron latch body pins. . . , 

Apron latch levers 

Apron latch lever pins 

Apron latch plungers 

Apron latch springs , 

Apron latch plunger eyes , 
Apron latch plunger eye 

pins. 
Apron latch bushings. 
Wheels, 61-inch, rubber tired, 
complete, including— 

Hub boxes 

Hub rings 

Hub liners 

Hub bands 



Suspended from brake shaft 
bracket. 



Lock washers 

Wheel hooks, 1 right, 1 
left. 

Wheel hook bushings 

Hub caps 

Hub latches, complete . . . 



Outer flanges of hubs 

Forced into hub boxes 

Screwed on hub boxes between 

wheel hook bushing and hub 

caps. 

On end of axle 

On outside of hubs 



} IV 



Under wheel hooks 

On end of hubs 

Actuate hub latch plungers 'J 



44 



Nomenclature of parts — Continued . 



Name oi part. 



Location, etc. 



Property 

classifi ca- 
tion. 



Class. 



Sec- 
tion. 



Wheels, 61-inch, rubber tired, 
complete, including— Con. 

Hub latch springs 

Hub latch plungers 

Wheel oil valves, complete 

Oil valve springs 

Oil valve rivets 

Oil valve washers 

Spokes, 16 right, 16 left. . . 

Felloe segment, bent, 
with 16 bolts and wash- 
ers. 

Felloe bands 

Base bands 

Tires, rubber 

Spoke shoes and rivets 

Spoke shoe plates : 

Carriage bolts and nuts. . . 



Wheel fastenings, complete, 
including — 

Wheel fastenings 

Wheel fastening plungers . 

Wheel fastening springs. . . 

Wheel fastening plugs 

Sight packing, complete 

Rear support.... f° Q r u Xn? 
Front support...] ^^ 

Bolts and nuts. 

Supports (for panoramic sight 

case). 
Bolts and nuts, 2 long, 2 short. 
Range quadrant case, com- 
plete. 

Support pins 

Panoramic sight . case, com- 
plete. 

Support pins 

Sighting arrangement, com- 
plete, including— 

Front sight, complete 

Sight bracket with shank 
socket. 

Sight shank 

Range quadrant 

Panoramic sight , 

Teat wrench for pano- 
ramic sight. 



Lock hub caps in place. 
Slide in hub caps. 



Bolted to felloe bands . 



Bolted to felloe segments 

Pressed over felloe bands 

On base bands 

Hold spokes to felloes 

Between spokes and felloes 

Clamp spokes between hub boxes 
and rings. 



At ends of axle. 



In trail tool box 

Bolted to right flask. 



For front and rear supports 

1 right, 1 left, bolted to main. I 
shield. 



Pinned to supports 

For range quadrant case. 
Pinned to supports 



For panoramic sight case. 



On sight fastening. 
On rear support. . . 



In shank socket 

On quadrant fastening 

Fitted to rear sight shank . 
Incase 



5 




* >? 



**$ 



45 

DESCRIPTION OF THE CARRIAGE. 

[Plates XI, XII, XIII, XIV, XV, XVI, and XVII.] 

The 4. 7-inch gun carriage, model of 1906, is of the type known as 
the long recoil in which the gun is permitted a sufficient length of 
.recoil on the carriage to render the latter stationary under firing 
stresses. A steel casting called a pintle bearing is mounted upon an 
axle and braced by the trail to form a swivel base for a steel yoke pro- 
vided with bearings in which the trunnions of the cradle rest. The 
cradel is a framework, with heavy rails which support the gun, and 
contains the hydraulic cylinder which controls the gun in recoil and 
the springs that return the piece to the original firing position. Due 
to the change from steel to rubber tires there are two types of car- 
riages, the tire brake and the band brake. 

For the purpose of description, the carriage may be considered as 
composed of the following divisions, viz, wheels, axle, trail, and 
spade, pintle yoke and bearing, cradle, recoil cylinder, counter-recoil 
spring system, traversing mechanism, elevating mechanism, brake, 
shield, sights, firing mechanism, recoil indicator, and shoulder 
guard. The dust guard, actually attached between the front clip 
and jacket of the gun, is also to be considered as a part of the carriage. 



The wheels are a modified form of the Archibald pattern, 61 inches 
in diameter, 6-inch face and rubber tired. The hub consists of a 
steel hub box and hub ring, the two having flanges which clamp 
the spokes and are drawn together by eight heavy bolts and a ring- 
called a hub band, which is threaded to the hub box. The lock 
washer and the wheel hook bushing are located on the hub box 
between the hub band and the hub ring. The wheel hook bushing 
is assembled under the wheel hook and by means of a flange secures 
the hook to the wheel. The wheel hook is used for attachment of 
ropes or chains in emergency traction. The lock washer is located 
between the wheel hook bushing and the hub band and prevents 
the latter from unscrewing. 

A removable bronze liner is forced into the hub box to form a 
wearing surface, and the outer end of the hub is closed by a bronze 
hub cap screwed on the hub box and locked with a small bolt, called 
the hub latch plunger, which is withdrawn and held in the disen- 
gaged position by the hub latch when the cap is to be unscrewed. 
The hub cap is also fitted with the standard wheel oil valve, which 
is pulled out to expose the opening for oiling the wheel and closes 
to render the hub dust proof. 

There are 4 bentwood felloe segments held by bolts to the steel 
felloe bands and to the 16 spokes by the spoke shoe plates, spoke 
shoes and rivets. The steel base bands, to which the rubber tires 
are fastened, are pressed on the felloe bands. 

The rubber tire and base band form an integral part necessitating 
the change of the base band as well when a rubber tire needs replace- 
ment. This replacement can be made only where there is a hy- 



46 

draulic press of sufficient capacity; so that in the field a wheel 
with a tire unfit for use is replaced by a spare wheel and the entire 
wheel sent back to a depot for the replacement of the tire. 

WHEEL FASTENINGS. 

The wheel fastening, a yoke of bronze, fitting recesses in the outer 
end of the axle arm, secures the wheel to the axle and is exposed 
when the hub cap is removed. The yoke is secured to the axle arm 
by the wheel fastening plunger. 



The axle is hollow and forged from a single piece of steel. The 
axle arms will take the standard hubs, being similar to all others in 
the battery, and the key, solid with the axle, holds the trail axle 
bearings, brake shaft brackets, and pintle bearing in their proper 
interrelation. 

THE TRAIL. 

The flasks of the trail are of channel section with the flanges 
turned inward and are connected by several transoms and braced 
by riveted plates to form a rigid framework. The forward ends of 
these flasks extend beyond and surround the axle and are rein- 
forced by cast-steel axle bearings, which are clamped to the axle 
by bolts. A short distance in rear of the axle are the traversing tran- 
som, front, and traversing transom, rear, riveted to the flasks, the 
first forming a rest for the traversing bracket and the other a seat 
for the frame of the elevating mechanism. The space between the 
third and fourth transoms is utilized as a tool box, having a floor and 
a hinged lid with a shot-bolt handle and padlock. The rest of the 
trail is covered with a single plate which extends around the lower 
end and for about 2 feet forward on the underside, and has an open- 
ing, with hinged cover for the traveling lock, the frame of which 
constitutes a fifth transom. The lunette transom, with its renew- 
able bushing bored to receive the pintle of the limber, is riveted 
about 27 inches from the lower end. A spade bracket reinforces the 
lower end of each flask, while the spade key bracket braced by the 
trail end reinforce plate forms the extreme lower end of trail and seat 
for the spade. 

SPADE. 

For carriages with serial numbers 1 to 40, inclusive, a spade of the 
following construction is used: 

The spade frame is a plate of flange steel placed crosswise the cen- 
ter line of the trail with wings extending to the front ; between these 
wings and parallel to them, with flanges butting against and riveted 
to the spade frame, are two braces, whose upper portions extend 
above the frameand receive steel fittings for attachment to the trail ; 
resting on the wings of the frame and riveted to the spade braces are 
the floats which meet in rear and with a reinforce called the spade 
plate form a heavy rail across the top of the spade. The wings of the 
floats project on either side of the spade to give sufficient bearing in 



47 

preventing the end of the trail from burying itself in the ground. A 
hardened steel wearing edge is riveted to the lower edge of the spade 
frame. In service, whenVorn or broken, the spade edge may be 
replaced. The spade reinforce is a V-shaped beam of flange steel 
riveted to the inside of the spade frame and to the spade braces for 
the purpose of stiffening the construction. The fittings for attach- 
ment to the trail are the center bearings and rear bearings which are 
riveted to the spade braces. The spade pin passes through the 
center bearings and the spade brackets of the trail; the rear bearings 
serve in connection with corresponding bearings in the spade key 
bracket of the trail and a detachable pin called the spade key, to 
lock the spade in its position underneath the trail when the carriage 
is unlimbered. 

For traveling the key is removed, the spade is rotated about the 
pin until the rear bearings coincide with" the forward hojes^ of the 
spade bracket, when the key is inserted to lock the spade in its new 
position. The spade key and spade pin also secure two handspikes, 
which are arranged to fold with the spade in limbering. 

For carriages with serial numbers above 40 a spade of the following 
construction is used: 

The spade frame is a flange steel plate placed crosswise the center 
line of the trail with wings extending to the front and riveted to the 
frame ; on its rear and side wings is located the float. Bearing plates, 
right and left, are riveted to the float parallel with the center line of 
the trail and to the rear of the frame and form seats for the spade 
pin and spade key. The spade edge and^ spade points are riveted 
to the lower rear edge of the frame, and in service, when worn or 
broken, may be replaced. The spade reinforce is a T-angle riveted 
to the inside of the spade frame and the bearing plates for the pur- 
pose of stiffening the construction. When unlimbered the spade pin 
is secured in the forward seats of the spade bearings and rear seats of 
the spade brackets, and the spade key is secured to the rear seats of 
the bearing plates and the seats in the spade key bracket. For 
traveling the key is removed, the spade is rotated about the pin 
until the spade key seats in the bearing plates coincide with the 
front holes of the spade brackets, when the key is inserted to lock 
the spade in its new position. The spade key and spade pin also 
secure two handspikes, which are arranged to fold with the spade in 
limbering. 

This spade is interchangeable with the one used on carriages with 
serial numbers 1 to 40 and will be issued in case a spade of the older 
construction requires replacement, although it will also be necessary 
to replace the spade key bracket. 

TRAIL PROP. 

A trail prop for supporting the trail in limbering is hinged in brack- 
ets riveted underneath the flasks and arranged to swing forward 
against the bottom of the trail when not in use, where it is held by a 
prop chain and hook. Four trail handles, two on either side, are 
riveted to the flasks. 



48 

The attachments for carrying the sponge and the head staff are 
placed on the right side of the trail, those for the two remaining sec- 
tions of the star! upon the left. The lower attachments or sockets 
are used as bases for the wheel guard liners designed to prevent the 
wheels of, the limber from damaging the trail when making short 
turns. These are to be renewed when worn. Two seats for the can- 
noneers serving the piece are riveted to brackets, one on either side 
of the trail. 

A name plate giving the name and number of the carriage, model, 
name of manufacturer, year of completion, and initials of inspector 
is riveted to the tool box top plate. In all reports and correspondence 
the carriage should be designated by the number and model given on the 
name 'plate. 

PINTLE BEARING AND YOKE. 

. The pintle bearing is a steel casting assembled between the axle 
bearings of the trail and supported partly by the axle and partly 
by the bearings to which it is # secured by heavy bolts. Two hinge 
lugs cast upon its forward surface receive the inner ends of the brake 
beams. It is bored and lined with bronze to form a horizontal taper- 
ing seat for the pintle yoke and provided with three clips which 
engage mating parts on the yoke and firmly secure the two together 
while allowing rotation of the yoke about a vertical axis. Provision 
for lubrication of the pintle is made by oil grooves. Two arms 
on the pintle yoke extend from its base upward and form horizontal 
bearings for the trunnions of the cradle, having trunnion caps hinged 
at the rear and fastened with tap bolts in front. Replaceable 
bronze liners in these bearings receive the weight and wear due to 
the trunnions. 



• Two parallel steel tubes 7 inches in diameter (spring cylinders; , 
connected by three strong steel bands, are surmounted by heavy steel 
rails, shaped to fit the clips of the gun and faced with bronze wearing 
surfaces, to form the cradle. The forward ends of the cradle rails 
being turned upward form stops against which the locking hoop of 
the gun strikes in counter recoil, limiting the forward movement of 
the gun on the cradle. 

For carriages ivith serial Jiumbers 1 to 40, inclusive, the cradle band, 
front, carries the recoil cylinder lock and also has lugs to receive the 
swing bolts of a detachable extension of the inner ways of the cradle. 
This extension rail is of flanged steel formed to shape and built 
up. It has at its rear end a bracket in which are pivoted the ex- 
tension rail bolts, and about one-fourth of its length forward of this 
bracket are the extension rail bearings. The extension rail pin 
passes through the lugs provided for it on the cylinder covers and 
the extension rail bearings, forming a front support for the rail. 
The separator rivet secures the sides of the rail body together. The 
extension rail is designed as a guide for the front clips of the gun, 
and is not intended to support weight. For traveling, after the gun 
has been retracted to its traveling position, the extension rail pin is 



49 

withdrawn (to be replaced later in the extension rail), the swing 
bolts are loosened, and the extension rail carried back and slipped 
upon the extension rail carrier, which hangs from suitable fasten- 
ings in the rear of the tool box in the rail. The carrier consists of a 
bottom plate hung by a hook, at its rear end, to the trail cover plate 
and secured by a pin with a spring catch at the front end, passing 
through the fastener (male) riveted to the bottom plate and the 
fastener (female) riveted to the tool box rear transom. 

The cradle band, rear, is bored to engage the head of the inner 
elevating screw and has a boss to admit the point of the elevating 
and traversing lock bolt. The trunnion band has a threaded seat 
for the recoil cylinder. The cylinder covers close the front ends of 
the spring cylinders and act as spring retainers whenever the spring 
rods are free, and also support the extension rail. Cylinder-cover 
hinge pins secure the covers to cylinder cover hinges riveted to the 
spring cylinders. For carriages with serial numbers above 40 the cradle 
band, front, carries the recoil cylinder lock only, and the cradle 
band, rear, is bored to engage the head of the inner elevating screw 
and also has a lug to engage the elevating and traversing lock bar. 
The trunnion band has a threaded seat forthe recoil cylinder. The 
cylinder cover closes the front ends of the spring cylinders and acts as 
a spring retainer whenever the spring rods are free, and also supports 
the extension rail. Swing bolts pinned to the cover secure it to 
the swing bolt forks riveted to the spring cylinders. The extension 
rail is of flange steel formed to shape and built up. It is designed as 
a guide for the front clips of the gun and for that purpose has bronze 
liners mounted on its top side. Bearing plates on the sides of the 
rail at the rear have seats for the extension rail pin and plungers. This 
pin fastens the rail to the seats on the lower portion of the cylinder 
cover. In the firing position, two plungers secure the rail to the 
cylinder cover in line with the main cradle rail. In traveling, after 
the gun has been retracted to its traveling position, the plungers 
are withdrawn from their seats in the cylinder cover, allowing the 
extension rail to swing around the pin. A latch secured to the front 
end of the rail engages a latch socket riveted to the underside of the 
cylinders, thus holding the rail out of the way. 

For all carriages, regardless of serial number, the rear ends of the 
spring cylinders are flanged inward and riveted to its bronze heads, 
against which rest the spring columns. The left cylinder has also 
a bracket for the shoulder guard and the right cylinder a bracket for 
the firing mechanism. On the exterior of the left spring cylinder 
are riveted sight bracket supports for the front and rear sights. On 
the right spring cylinder are the recoil indicator guide and range 
quadrant fastening. All of these parts which are riveted together, 
and including the cylinder covers, cylinder cover hinge pins, cl- 
ewing bolts and pins, and recoil cylinder lock, are considered integral 
parts of the cradle and are included in the designation of "one 
cradle, complete." 

The recoil cylinder is a steel tube 77.4 inches long and 4.93 inches 
outside diameter. Its rear end is closed by a forged-steel stuffing 
box screwed into the cylinder with a fiber gasket to make an oil- 

49877°— 18 4 



50 

tight joint, and forming, with a threaded stuffing-box gland, a 
stuffing box packed with five rings of Garlock's hydraulic water- 
proof packing for the piston rod. The cylinder head with a fiber 
gasket closes the front end. The front end of the cylinder is enlarged 
to form a flange 5.3 inches in diameter and notched to take a spanner, 
which also fits a similar flange on the cylinder head. The cylinder 
should be held by a wrench on this notched flange in assembling or 
removing the heads; it should never be clamped in a vise or simi- 
larly held, as its walls are thin, and while amply strong for the pur- 
poses for which intended, may be deformed or flattened by such 
violent usage. The ribs of the flanges are lashed with copper wire 
to prevent unscrewing. Both heads have small holes through their 
walls, closed by filling and drain plugs resting on oil-tight copper 
gaskets for the purpose indicated in the name of the plugs. For 
carriages with serial numbers 1 to 40, inclusive, the cylinder wall near 
the front end is provided with three notches to receive the recoil 
cylinder lock. The notch into which the lock should fall is that 
which brings the threaded part of the cylinder nearest to being flush 
with the front of the trunnion band, as this insures proper relation 
of the piston and throttling bars. For carriages with serial numbers 
above 40, the cylinder wall near the front end is provided with one 
notch to receive the recoil cylinder lock. The cylinder head forms 
a socket for the counter recoil buffer, a tapered bronze rod which 
fits with a small clearance into the piston rod bore when the gun 
is in battery. The counterrecoil buffer is, for purposes of assem- 
blage, a portion of the cylinder head, and is assembled in or removed 
from the cylinder with the cylinder head. On the interior of the 
recoil cylinder are machined three longitudinal ribs or throttling 
bars of uniform width but varying height. Corresponding notches 
cut in the piston form ports for the passage of the liquid from one 
side of the piston to the other. The height of the throttling bar3 
along the cylinder determines the area of these ports and is calcu- 
lated so as to make the resistance which the liquid offers, plus the 
resistance of the springs, such that the wheels will not jump from 
the ground when the piece is fired at 0° elevation. This object is 
accomplished by making at each instant the gravity moment of the 
system about a horizontal axis through the point of support of the 
end of the trail greater than the sum of the moments of the piston 
rod pull and the spring resistance about the same axis. The piston 
rod is of steel, fitted with a bronze piston rod head screwed on 
against a shoulder at the front end. The head has three notches 
cut in its perimeter which fit over the throttling bar projections on 
the cylinder walls. The front end of the piston rod is bored out for 
a sufficient depth to take the counterrecoil buffer, which fits into 
the bore with a very small clearance. In counterrecoil, the oil 
caught in this bore can escape only by the small clearance men- 
tioned, with the result that the return of the gun into battery is so 
eased and regulated that all shock and consequent derangement of 
the aim of the piece is eliminated. The rear end of the piston rod 
is secured to the recoil lug on the gun and to the spring rod yoke by 
its nut. 



51 

Inside each spring cylinder of the cradle is a column of helical 
springs of round wire in three sections, called the outer counter- 
recoil springs^ separated by thin washers called spring separators, 
outer. Within this column is a spring stirrup, outer, with its front 
end enlarged to retain a spring stirrup flange, outer, which bears 
against the front end of the outer springy column. The rear end of 
this spring stirrup, outer, is contracted inwardly to retain a spring 
stirrup head, outer, _ another bronze ring against which a second 
column of helical springs in three sections, called the middle counter- 
recoil springs, with the intermediate separators, bear. This in turn 
contains a second tube, the spring stirrup, inner, enlarged outwardly 
and provided with a bronze spring stirrup flange, inkier, at the for- 
ward end and turned inwardly with a bronze spring stirrup head, 
inner, at the rear end, which connects and surrounds a third column 
of helical springs, also in three sections, called the inner counter- 
recoil springs, and the inner separators. Lastly, a spring rod, with 
a bronze spring rod flange resting against a solid collar formed by 
enlarging the forward end of the rod, passes through the inner springs, 
the flange bearing against the front end of the spring, the rear end 
passing through a heavy cross piece behind the lug of the gun, called 
a spring rod yoke, and fastened to the same by a nut. When the 
gun with the spring rod yoke and spring rods moves to the rear in 
recoil the flanges on the front of the spring rods act on the inner coils, 
the pressure being transmitted to the middle coils by the inner 
stirrup and to the outer coils by the outer stirrup and resisted by the 
rear heads of the spring cylinders. In this way the springs work in 
tandem and have a long stroke with short assembled length. To 
properly return the gun to battery at high angles of elevation, the 
springs are assembled with an initial compression of 1,000 pounds 
on each side. 

THE FIRING DEVICE. 

The firing device consists of a bracket bolted to the right spring 
cylinder head, firing handle, handle return spring, shaft return 
spring, firing handle shaft and pallet, shaft trip collar, shaft retaining 
collar, adjusting screw, trip latch, trip latch spring, trip latch 
plunger, and trip collar pin. 

The bracket has a cylindrical portion, the cylinder haying a central 
diaphragm or partition. In the rear portion of this cylinder is fitted 
the shaft return spring which acts on the firing handle shaft—that is, 
this spring causes the firing handle shaft and pallet to return to their 
normal position after the sear has been tripped and the gun fired, 
whether the operator releases the firing handle or not. 

The firing handle is mounted loosely on the forward end of the 
firing handle shaft and pallet and is counected therewith by means 
of a shaft trip co liar and latch . The coll ar is provided with a squared 
opening which fits over a correspondingly squared end on the forward 
end of the firing handle shaft. 

The hub of the firing handle is provided with a trip latch so ar- 
ranged that the latch is engaged in a notch in the periphery of the 
shaft trip collar. 



52 

By this means the firing handle is temporarily attached to the 
shaft. By a sufficient downward movement of the thing handle the 
head of the trip latch plunger is caused to come in contact with the 
end of the ad j listing screw located in the firing bracket. This engage- 
ment between the adjusting screw and trip latch plunger forces the 
latter upward, thereby releasing the trip latch and permitting the 
firing handle shaft and pallet to return to their normal position. 
Upon the release of the firing handle, the handle return spring 
restores it to its original position. 

On the rear end of the firing handle shaft is formed the firing pallet, 
which projects far enough to the rear to engage a projection on the 
lower end of the trigger shaft. The firing pallet is of such length 
that the gun can be fired when within 2.5 inches of being in battery. 
By pressing down on the firing handle the following results: The 
firing handle shaft and pallet are rotated, the shaft return and handle 
return springs are put under additional tension, the trigger shaft 
rotates, # which in turn rotates the trigger fork, compressing the 
firing pin spring through the medium of the firing spring sleeve until 
the front vnd of the latter trips the sear and releases the firing pin. 

ACTION OP THE MECHANISM DURING RECOIL. 

The action of the carriage when the gun is fired is as follows: The 
£un moves to the rear 70 inches on the cradle ways, carrying with it 
the piston rod, soring rods, and spring rod yoke and compressing the 
counterrecoil springs. As the recoil cylinder remains stationary the 
oil behind the piston must pass to its forward side. The energy of 
recoil of the gun is absorbed by the resistance which the oil offers to 
being forced through small openings past the piston and by the resist- 
ance of the counterrecoil springs. The energystored up by the 
springs returns the gun to its firing position. This return movement 
is eased and regulated by the counterrecoil buffer. The piston rod 
pull and spring resistance are transmitted to the carriage, but owing 
to its weight and the resistance opposed to the trail spade by the 
earth the carriage remains stationary. 

RECOLL INDICATOR AND DUST GUARD. 

The length of recoil of the gun upon the carriage is shown by the 
recoil indicator, a simple friction slide working in the recoil indicator 
guide, which is mounted upon a bracket riveted to the right spring 
cylinder in a convenient position for observation. The slide is 
actuated by the recoil indicator throw attached to a projecting 
arm of the dust guard with two pins. The bronze dust guard is 
secured by three button head screws to the gun between the locking 
hoop and front clip and covers and protects the cradle rails from 
dust and dirt. It recoils with the gun, and has felt liners or wipers 
which sweep the cradle rails at each stroke of recoil and counter- 
recoil. 



fl_/3Te::x^ 



»run? 




Handspike 



BeuF'ingr Plate 

Float 
Spade Eelpe 

Jpacte Point 






' 



Latch Plunder 
Latch Base 
p l"naerMna 




PL^TEIIXEZ: 



Bean a • 



Rear Cradle Ban cl 



Loct: Bar 
T.ocn Bar Bear i no 
Bearma B/nee 



Extension Hail Body 
Bearinf/ Plate 
Swino Belt ForK 

l.gniiiUtdinal Sections of h't tension fiatj 



Elevffear Cover 



Lon(/ilii£tm»i-SpclJpax^ 
Elev.Mech 6' iJvi and TYnvLocK 



4.7 Inch Gun Carriage, Model of 1906 
View af Carnages with Serial f/os. above- 



Bear/no Plate 

float 
Spade l.'dae 
-Spade l*oint 



53 



TRAVERSING MECHANISM. 

The traversing mechanism consists, first, of a bronze traversing 
nut pivoted on vertical trunnions mounted in the traversing bracket 
and in a part called the traversing yoke bolted to the traversing 
bracket; second, a traversing screw with a hand wheel mounted 
in a bearing also swinging on vertical trunnions supported by the 
traversing screw bracket, with cap, bolted to the left flask of the 
trail. 

The traversing bracket is a steel casting bolted at its rear end to 
the elevating yoke and at its front end to the under surface of the 
pintle yoke, the combination rotating as one piece in the pintle 
bearing. 

Longitudinal movement of the screw is prevented by a shoulder 
on either side of its bearing. When the handwheel is turned the 
nut travels on the screw, carrying the traversing bracket with it 
angular motion of the screw with reference to the axis of the carriage 
being permitted by the vertical pivots of the nut and the ^ bearing. 
An azimuth pointer bolted to the left side of the elevating yoke 
indicates upon the azimuth scale the position of the gun in azimuth. 
The scale is carried by a bracket riveted to the left flask of the trail* 
T t shows an allowable traversing movement of 140 milliemes, 70 on 
each side of the axis of the carriage, with graduations of a least read- 
ing of 5 milliemes. 

ELEVATING MECHANISM. 

The traversing bracket is extended to the rear by two side plates, 
the elevating yoke sides and a rear cross piece called the elevating 
yoke transom, of cast steel held solidly together by five bolts. The 
elevating yoke transom has a wide bearing surface resting upon 
the traversing transom liner, rear, and is provided with a clip finished 
on a radius from the pintle bearing center which embraces a mating 
part of the liner and prevents vertical motion of the elevating yoke. 
The elevating yoke sides are bored about a horizontal axis normal 
to the center line of the yoke and fitted with bronze bushings to 
receive the elevating gear bracket. 

The elevating gear (PI. XVI) is of the double screw type and consists 
of an inner and an outer elevating screw, an elevating gear bracket, 
a bevel gear, two bevel pinions, and two shafts with handwheels. 
The inner elevating screw is a steel screw, threaded with a right- 
hand thread. It is attached at its upper end by the elevating pin to 
the cradle band rear. The outer elevating screw is of bronze and is 
threaded on the exterior with a left-hand thread, while the bore is 
threaded with a right-hand thread to take the inner elevating screw. 
On the exterior are also cut two longitudinal keyways in which the 
keys of the bevel gear work. 

The elevating gear bracket is bored out and threaded to take the 
outer elevating screw, and is provided with two trunnions, which 
rest in bearings in the elevating yoke sides. These trunnions are 
bored and bushed to form bearings for the elevating pinion snatts, of 
which there are two, one on each side, projecting through slots in 



54 

the flasks of the trail. A steel elevating bevel pinion is pinned and 
keyed on the inner end of each pinion shaft and meshes with a bronze 
elevating bevel gear mounted on the outer elevating screw in a seat 
slotted through the gear bracket. The bore of the bevel gear is 
fitted with two steel keys, which fit into the kevways in the outer 
screw. This arrangement constrains the outer screw to rotate with 
the bevel gear while permitting it a relative longitudinal motion. 
The revolution of the elevating handwheel rotates the pinions and 
through them the bevel gear. The outer screw turns with the latter 
and moves up or down in the elevating gear bracket according to the 
direction of its rotation. The inner screw is prevented from rotating 
by its attachment to the cradle and on account of the direction of 
its threads moves into or out of the outer screw as the latter is screwed 
into or out of the gear bracket. 

For carriages with serial numbers 1 to 40, inclusive, an elevating 
screw cover of bronze is attached by three springs to the lower end 
of the bracket to exclude dust from below, while for carriages with 
serial numbers above 40, an elevating screw cover is attached to 
the bracket threads and is secured by a split pin. In traveling, the 
elevating gear should be run to the position of maximum elevation 
to house the screws in the elevating gear bracket. In this position, 
for carriages with serial numbers 1 to 40, inclusive, the face of the 
lug on the elevating bevel gear strikes against the elevating bevel 
gear stop on the rear cradle band, and for carriages with serial num- 
bers above 40, the face of the lug strikes against a lug integral with 
the rear cradle band. The mechanism is designed to give a maxi- 
mum elevation of 15° and a maximum depression of 5°. 

ELEVATING AND TRAVERSING LOCK. 

To relieve the pointing mechanism from all strains in traveling, 
an elevating and traversing lock is provided by which the cradle 
may be securely locked to the trail. 

For carriages with serial numbers 14o 40, inclusive, this arrangement 
is as follows: 

A lock bolt is mounted in the lock bolt casing which is a bracket 
bolted to the traversing transom rear and tool box front transom. 
On the end of the lock bolt is riveted and pinned the lock bolt end 
on which is pinned the link. The lock bolt spring is located around 
the bolt in the casing and tends to keep the bolt toward the front. 
The lever fulcrum is threaded and pinned to the casing and acts as 
a fulcrum for the lever, one end of which is formed into a handle and 
the other is pinned to the link. On the tool box top plate is riveted 
the lever guide to which the lever is attached when the lock bolt is 
not secured in its seat on the bottom of the rear cradle band. The 
bolt is arranged to enter its seat when the gun is at 15° elevation and 
0° azimuth. 

Carriages with serial numbers above 40 have the following arrange- 
ment: 

A lock bar is seated in bearings riveted to each flask. . To the left 
end of the bar is pinned the lock bar lever on the end of which is 



55 

threaded trie handle and in the handle is located a spring and plunger. 
When the gun is at 15° elevation and 0° azimuth the lock bar may 
be rotated until the lock bar fully engages the lug of the rear cradle 
band. In that position the plunger in the handle engages the lever 
fastening riveted to the left flask and locks the bar. 

TRAVELING LOCK. 

These elevating and traversing locks are sufficiently strong to 
secure the gun when traveling short distances. For use on long 
marches it is desirable to equalize the load on the wheels of carriage 
and limber. The gun is disconnected from the spring columns 
and piston rod and retracted until the breech lug engages the trav- 
eling lock provided in the trail. A cast-steel bracket — traveling 
lock frame — is riveted between the flasks some distance below the 
tool box. Two cast-steel traveling lock legs are pivoted in this 
frame, one on each side, the right leg having a folding prop for sup- 
porting it in an inclined position. The shifting of weights must 
be done with the elevating and traversing lock bolt or lock bar 
engaged with the cradle and the carriage limbered to avoid lifting 
the weights of the gun in limbering and to avoid the tendency of 
the piece to slide off the inclined cradle ways when not held by the 
springs. The spring rod and piston rod nuts being removed, the 
spring yoke and piston rod nut should be placed in the tool box 
and the spring rod nuts reassembled on the spring rods and secured 
by their split pins to prevent loss. _ The right leg of the traveling 
lock being raised and supported by its prop, the gun is slipped back 
until the breech lug stops against the leg. The left leg is now 
raised into position in front of the breech lug and the lock bolt 
and sleeve inserted and secured by the lock bolt nut. The traveling 
lock cover should be fixed in the fasteners provided for either the 
open or closed positions. No special tools should ordinarily be 
required for this operation, the standard pole or other improvised 
rod being used to start the gun. 

ROAD BRAKE (TIRE BRAKE). 

The road brake is of the lever type. Two brake shaft brackets are 
keyed to the axle, one on each side of the trail. Each is split and 
clamped to the axle with two bolts which lie in notches in the axle 
key and prevent displacement of the brackets and longitudinal 
movement of the trail on the axle. These brackets have bearing 
lugs with bronze bushings forward of the axle for the brake cranks, 
arms extending to the rear upon which are suspended the apron 
latches, and lugs to which is bolted the main shield plate. The 
brake shaft bracket, right, has also a fan-shaped flange to which is 
bolted a forged-steel brake segment. Two brake beams of cast steel 
are pivoted in lugs on the front of the pintle bearing and at their 
outer ends carry brake shoes of cast iron hinged on vertical pivots 
so as to bear against the rubber tires of the wheels. Brake rods 
in tension connect the forward ends of the brake beams to the brake 



56 

cranks upon the brake shaft. These rods are in several pieces; 
the brake rod passes through a stiff helical brake rod spring and the 
end of a bronze brake spring cover and is screwed into the brake 
rod end which is joined to the brake beam by the brake rod pin. 
The brake spring cover end is screwed into the brake spring cover, 
the spring being compressed between the forward end of the cover 
and a flange on the brake rod, which is arranged to have a small 
longitudinal movement against the pressure of the spring. Adjust- 
ment to compensate for wear of the brake shoes is secured by varying 
the distance the brake rod end is screwed upon the brake rod. 
The brake rod springs insure the desired pressure of the brake 
shoes on tires of wheels having variable radii. The hubs of the brake 
cranks form sleeves, assembled from the outside in the bearings of 
the brake shaft brackets. The brake shaft is squared at the ends to 
enter the brake cranks and is pinned to them to prevent longitu- 
dinal displacement.^ The squared right end of the shaft also carries a 
sleeve to which is hinged the brake lever. When the brakes are set, 
the lever is held by the teeth of the brake segment rack engaging the 
brake lever catch, a small steel piece riveted to the brake lever, and 
which may be replaced when broken or worn. A spring holds the 
lever and catch in contact with the segment. The brake is to be used 
as a firing as well as a road brake. The brake should be used only when 
necessary, as the brake shoes bear directly on the rubber tires. 

ROAD BRAKE (BAND BRAKE). 

The band brake equipment consists of a contracting band brake 
with lever located on the right side of the gun. Two brake shaft 
brackets are keyed and clamped by bolts to the axle, the right-hand 
one designed to support a rack segment for holding the brake lever 
in the required position. This lever through linkage tightens the 
brake bands on the flange steel drums that are bolted to the wheels. 
The linings of the brake bands are renewable. Band guides riveted 
to the bands and fitting in the band clips retain the hands in position. 

This brake is used both as a road and firing brake. The lugs on 
the pintle for holding the brake beams of the tire brake are omitted 
on band brake carriages. _ Also changes in the shape of the shields 
and the position of the sight cases have been necessitated on band 
brake carriages. 

THE SHIELD. 

The shield for the protection of the crew is hardened steel plate 
0.15 inch thick, made in three parts — the apron, the main shield, and 
the top shield. The main shield is divided by the opening for the 
gun and cradle, the two sides being joined at the top by a flange steel 
hood, riveted on. It is rigidly attached by bolts to the brake shaft 
brackets and is braced by two main shield braces reaching from its 
upper corners to the trail flasks. The port in the left plate for the 
peep sight, when the sight is not being used, is covered by the peep 
sight port shutter. A catch on the rear of the shutter secures it in a 



'OPT- 



=£ 



■£L£W7r///6$CA 




Efl- 









PL/TTEIXSII 




S0£ 'ELSVAT/ON 



■f B /* /8 20 J* ATS? Sf ■*> - 



> e*aa se sa /& /a*/*s/e> />v //khks 



*aear*X)»er eav/ppeo with bano annnc 



57 

closed position. To its lower edge, which is about 3 inches below 
the center line of the axle, is' hinged the apron, 20 inches long. For 
traveling this is swung up to the rear and held by two apron latches 
attached to the arms of the brake shaft brackets. 

The apron latch bodies are pivoted to the arms of the brake shaft 
brackets; the lower end of the latch body is formed into a hook 
which engages an apron latch staple riveted in the apron, and holds 
the latter in its traveling position. To prevent accidental disengage- 
ment of the hook from the staple, the opening of the hook is closed by 
the apron latch plunger seated in the body and pressed outward 
into action by a coiled spring. A grip lever, called the apron latch 
lever, is provided for withdrawing the plunger from the hook opening 
when it is desired to disengage the hook from the staple. 

The top shield is hinged to the main shield and braced to twc 
brackets on the main shield by the top shield braces, which serve 
to fasten the top shield in either the raised or folded positions. 
Raised, the upper edge of the top shield is about 69.25 inches above 
the ground, sufficient to afford protection from long range or high 
angle fire to cannoneers on the trail seats. Folded, the top is low- 
ered to the rear to allow the panoramic sight line to sweep above it. 
The port in the top shield for the panoramic sight may also be closed, 
when the sight is not in use, by the panoramic sight port shutter, 
similar in design to the shutter used on the main shield . 

SHOULDER GUARD. 

For the protection of the cannoneer sighting the gun a shoulder 
guard is attached to the left spring cylinder at its rear end. The. 
shoulder guard bracketis riveted to the cylinder, but the guard 
itself is detachable and is secured in place by a steel pin. 

SIGHT AND RANGE QUADRANT TRAVELING CASES. 

A leather-lined flange steel box, called the panoramic sight case, 
attached to the rear face (left side) of the main shield, provides a 
place for the panoramic sight in traveling. This box has a hinged 
lid, secured by a, hasp and turnbuckle, and is provided with the 
usual padlock with chain for locking the box. The bronze supports 
for the sight case are fastened to the shield by four bolts. The sight 
case is supported between springs compressed in the supports and 
held in place by pins acting as spring rods. The mounting is such 
that the sight is well protected from injury due to shocks and jars. 
A similar case, called the range quadrant case, is mounted in essen- 
tially the same manner in supports bolted to the right flask of the 
trail, and is provided for the safe transport of the range quadrant. 
Packing blocks located in the tool box in the trail form a seat for the 
rear right shank. Canvas covers are provided for the front sight 
and rear sight brackets, the rear sight shank, and the sponge. They 
should be kept in place when these parts are not in use. 



58 



DESCRIPTION OF ONE OP THE ACCESSORIES. 

Spring compressor No. 4 is now furnished for all carriages. It 
consists of a rope about 5 feet 7 inches long, having at one end a 
6wivel and socket for attachment to the spring rod, and at the other 
end a socket for attachment to a plug on a 10-foot length of rope. 
This 10-foot rone is used only for passing the spring compressor 
through the spring columns. The spring compressor eye replaces it 
for attaching the compressor rope to the lifting hook of the duplex 
chain block. The operation is described on pa<*e 61. 

This spring compressor is carried on the artillery supply truck, 
and two will be furnished per battery. 

A list of the tools and accessories furnished with each carriage will 
be found on page 112. 

DISMOUNTING AND ASSEMBLING GUN AND CARRIAGE. 

To remove the recoil indicator throw: Withdraw the pins which 
attach the throw to the dust guard. The pins may be reassembled 
in the throw, with the split pins spread to prevent loss if the throw 
is to remain disengaged any length of time. 

To dismount the gun: Remove the recoil indicator throw, unscrew 
the piston rod and spring rod nuts, remove the spring rod yoke, and 
shove the gun to the rear until the clips are free from the cradle. 
The weight of the gun is carried by the duplex chain block and the 
chain sling provided for this purpose. If the gun is dismounted in 
the gun shed, the block may be attached to the roof; if in the field, it 
may be slung from the branches of a tree or some improvised tripod. 
In either case, the chain sling is looped around the gun, in front 
beyond the front clip, and in the rear between the clips and the gun 
lug. Burlap should be placed between to protect the various parts. 
It should be noted that the center of gravity is located about 51 
inches from the rear face of the breech. 

To mount the gun: Reverse the order of dismounting. The dust 
guard is to be assembled with the gun. 

In moving the gun on or off the cradle, particular care must be 
taken to support the breech end, so that the gun clips are in prolonga- 
tion of the cradle rails. The firing shaft is also quite liable to injury 
during this maneuver, and care should be taken to prevent its being 
struck by the muzzle of the gun or by implements in the hands of 
the cannoneers. The cradle should be placed at the desired eleva- 
tion and azimuth before beginning either of these maneuvers and not 
changed during its progress, since the working of either the elevating 
or traversing mechanisms when the gun is only part way in battery 
brings an excessive and unnecessary strain and wear upon these 
parts. 

To dismount the extension rail on carriages with serial numbers 1 to 
40, inclusive: The gun being ordinarily in retracted position, with- 
draw the extension rail pin, loosen the nuts of the extension rail 
bolts, and swing them free of the clips of the band, draw the rail for- 
ward and replace the extension rail pin in the extension rail. The 
extension rail is carried in the trail. 



59 

To 1 - assemble the extension rail in the trail for the same numbered car- 
riages: Pull the pin in the forward fasteners of the extension rail 
carrier, shove the carrier to the rear and disengage the hook, slide 
the extension rail on the carrier, starting the front end of the rail on 
the forward end of the carrier until the catch of^ the carrier locks the 
two together; assemble the hook of the carrier in the trail first, and 
then engage the forward fasteners and pin. 

To remove the extension rail of carriages ivith serial numbers above 
40: The gun being ordinarily in the retracted position, disconnect 
the extension rail plungers and allow the extension rail to swing 
downward around the extension rail pin. Swing the extension rail 
rearward until the latch plunger on the extension rail engages the 
extension rail latch socket on the cradle. Assemble in the reverse 
order. 

To dismount the recoil cylinder: Bring the cradle to approximately 
0° elevation, remove the extension rail and piston rod nut. Release 
the recoil cylinderlock on the underside of the cradle band front by 
pulling the split pin and allowing the lock to drop out of the slot in 
the cylinder (for carriages 1 to 40, inclusive, it will be necessary to 
mark the slot with chalk or penciHor identification in assembling), 
unscrew the cylinder from its seat in the trunnion band, moving the 
end of the spanner wrench from the right side of the carriage toward 
the left, and withdraw the cylinder forward from the cradle. 

Do not allow the threads on the cylinder or piston rod to strike 
the front band or become damaged in any way. Should the piston 
rod stick in the gun lug, it may be started by light blows from a 
block of wood after the cylinder is partially withdrawn from the 
cradle. The front end of the piston rod is_ close to the front head 
of the cylinder when both are in firing position. Hence battering 
the rear end of the piston rod will result in driving the piston against 
the front cylinder head to the probable damage of both. 

To assemble the recoil cylinder: Reverse the operation of dismount- 
ing, screwing the cylinder into the trunnion band and assembling 
the cylinder lock in the notch. For carriages with serial numbers 
1 to 40, inclusive, this notch should be that one which brings the 
threaded part of th^ cylinder nearest flush with the front of the 
trunnion band and ^he filling plug in the stuffing box on top. 

To drain the reco*' 1 cylinder: For carriages with serial numbers 1 
to 40, inclusive, bring the cradle to 0° elevation or slight depression, 
remove the drain plug in the front cylinder head and loosen the one 
in the stuffing box. Should the front plug not be in the lowest 
possible position, the cylinder may be rotated by loosening the 
recoil cylinder lock, or the cylinder may bo entirely dismounted. 
As soon as thoroughly drained, replace the drain plug and tighten 
securely. 

For carriages with serial numbers above 40, elevate the cradle 
to nearly maximum elevation and remove the drain plug near the 
lowest element of the stuffing box, and loosen the filling plug near 
the top element of the box. After the cylinder is thoroughly drained, 
replace the lower drain plug and tighten securely. 



60 

To fill the recoil cylinder: If the cylinder is not completely filled, 
loss of stability will occur and higher stresses than normal will be 
developed in the carriage; for this reason the cylinder should be filled 
with the greatest care; a commissioned officer should himself verify that 
the cylinder is full and that no air is left in it, with the exception of the 
void noted below . 

The easiest way to fill the cylinder is to fill it when disassembled 
from the carriage. If this is impracticable., fill as follows: Depress the 
gun to maximum depression and remove the top filling plug in the 
stuffing box. Fill slowly through this hole, using the filling funnel 
furnished with the artillery supply truck. When apparently full, 
allow a few minutes for the oil to settle and pocketed air to escape and 
then refill. When satisfied that the cylinder is entirely full, remove the 
funnel and elevate the gun enough to allow about 10 cubic inches (about 
one-third pint) of oil to escape, thus providing a void for the expansion 
of the oil. Then screw the filling plug in tightly. 

It may happen that after firing a few rounds the gun will not 
return to battery. This may be due to, first, weakness of springs; 
second, stuffing-box gland being screwed up too tightly; or, third, 
the oil having expanded, due to heat. 

In either case the cause must be ascertained and remedied; if due 
to expansion of oil, it is proven by the fact that the gun can not be 
pushed into battery by force exerted on the breech. In that case 
depress to maximum depression and remove the filling plug. The 
oil will now escape, permitting the gun to return to battery. 

Approximately 32 pints of oil are required for filling the cylinder. 
Hy choline oil of a specific gravity of 0.85 is furnished by the Ordnance 
Department for use in these cylinders ; it is characterized by its low 
freezing point and by its noncorrosive action on metals. The oil 
used in the cylinder is to be clean and free from grit and dirt; to 
insure this it is to be strained through a clean piece of linen or muslin 
before using. 

In emergencies water may be used in the cylinder. This should be 
done only when absolutely necessary and never in freezing weather, and as 
soon as practicable the cylinder is to be emptied, cleaned, and thoroughly 
dried, and filled with hydroline oil. 

To remove the piston and piston rod: With the cylinder in the cradle, 
bring the cradle to 0° elevation and drain out the oil. Unscrew the 
front cylinder head and remove it with the counterrecoil buffer. 
Take off the piston rod nut, slacken the gland to release the pressure 
on the rod, and pull the piston and rod out to the front. In replacing 
the rod it will probably not be found necessary to remove the gland 
and packing. In dismounting or assembling the front cylinder head, 
the cylinder should never be clamped in a vise, as its walls are thin 
and not intended to withstand such usage. The rear cylinder head — 
stufjing box — should never be unscrewed. 

To pack the stuffing box: The stuffing box is packed with five rings 
of Garlock's hydraulic waterproof packing, 0.375 square. The pack- 
ing is issued cut into rings of such size tnat the ends meet around the 
piston rod. The latter being assembled, each ring, placed so as to 
break joints with the preceding one, is forced in succession to its seat 



61 

by a packing tool of copper or hard wood, one end of which is shaped 
like a carpenter's gouge and the other end forms a handle strong 
enough to stand light taps from a hammer. Such a tool may be 
readily improvised by the battery artificer. After the five rings are 
firmly seated in the box, screw the gland down on the packing. 

In assembling the gland be sure that at least six of its threads are 
engaged with the threads of the stuffing box; otherwise the threads 
of the gland may be stripped in firing. With new packing it may be 
found difficult to insert more than four rings and secure sufficient 
engagement of the gland. In such a case the box should be packed 
with four rings and the piece fired a few rounds, after which the fifth 
ring should be inserted. 

Adjustment of the gland: The adjustment of the gland will require 
the exercise of some judgment. If screwed up too tight, the fric- 
tional resistance of the packing on the piston rod will be so much 
increased that the counterrecoil springs may fail to return the gun 
to battery, especially at high angles of elevation. It should be 
screwed up just tight enough to prevent the leakage of oil through 
the stuffing box. 

The necessity for dismounting parts of the recoil cylinder will 
seldom arise. It should be done only in the presence of a commis- 
sioned officer, who should see that the parts are handled with the 
greatest care. In assembling, the parts should be thoroughly cleaned, 
as the clearances in the cylinder are very small and the presence of 
small foreign particles may interfere with the proper working of the 
assembled parts. 

# To assemble the spring system: With the cradle at maximum eleva- 
tion and the trail horizontal shove the first section of the outer 
springs into its spring cylinder until its front end is about 2 inches 
in, set up a separator against the forward end of this section and 
enter the second section, keeping the separator upheld between the 
sections ; similarly when the outer end of the second section is 2 inches 
inside the spring cylinder enter the second separator and third section 
of spring. Shove the column in against the rear end of the spring 
cylinder (the front end of the last section will project about 30 inches), 
enter the outer stirrup and shove it in the outer springs until its for- 
ward flange rests against the end of the spring; it will then hold the 
last section in line. Proceed in like manner to assemble the interme- 
diate spring sections and separators; the forward end of the last sec- 
tion will project about 20 inches from the outer stirrup. Place one 
section of the inner spring column in the inner stirrup and the two 
others, with the separators, on the spring rod. Pass the spring-rod 
connection end of the spring compressor rope through the stirrup and 
one section of spring from the rear and screw it on the rear end of the 
rod; the rope, stirrup, springs, and spring rod are now entered as one 
piece in the intermediate springs, the rope passing out the rear end 
of the spring cylinder. After the springs are located at their assem- 
bled free height as above, the spring compressor extension is discon- 
nected and in its place is screwed the spring compressor eye. The 
lifting hook of the chain of the duplex block, secured to the rear end 
of the trail by passing the hook on the block under a crowbar placed 



62 

across and in rear of the handspikes or held by means of a picket rope, 
is brought forward and attached to the eye. The carriage should now 
be slightly traversed so that the taut rope will lie in the center line of 
the spring cylinder. 

In compressing the springs it will be found that the flange of the 
outer stirrup tends to sag and catch on the front end of the spring 
cylinder, and at the same time 'the rear end of the stirrup must be 
carefully guided through the rear spring cylinder head ; similarly the 
inner stirrup must be watched and guided as its flanges enter the 
outer stirrup. When the springs are sufficiently compressed the 
spring cylinder cover is to be assembled, care being taken to insure 
the exact adjustment of hinge pins and split pins or swing bolts. 
The compressor rope may now be slackened and disengaged from the 
spring rod and the other side of the system proceeded with. In 
assembling the other side of the system for carriages with serial num- 
bers 1 to 40, inclusive, the same method is used and the spring rod 
yoke is attached when the two spring cylinder covers are in place. 

In assembling the other side of the system for carriages with serial 
numbers above 40, it is necessary to secure the spring compressor 
block to the assembled spring rod and then remove the spring 
cylinder cover. When the two columns are assembled the cover is 
again attached, the block removed, and the spring rod yoke assem- 
bled in place. 

As the spring columns are assembled under a load of 1,000 pounds, 
serious results may attend a sudden release by breakage of the rope 
or other part while under tension. The ropes should be carefully 
inspected before using, and all persons be required to keep arms and 
bodies away from the front of the spring column during these opera- 
tions. Due to the inequalities of the spring pressure of the inner 
intermediate and outer springs, the outer or inner stirrup may pro- 
ject more to the rear on one side than on the other. 

To dismount the spring system: With the cradle at maximum ele- 
vation and the trail limbered, remove the spring rod plug nuts and 
the spring rod yoke. For carriages with serial numbers above 40, 
the spring compressor block should be attached to that spring rod, 
not being dismounted. 

Screw the spring compressor rope or body in its position on the rod 
to be dismounted and make the rope taut by means of the block 
located as above. Traverse the cradle slightly so that the taut rope 
lies in the center line of the spring cylinder. Remove the cylinder 
cover and slowly unwind the rope until the springs are free. If 
necessary to remove the other column for carriages with serial num- 
bers above 40, it will be necessary to replace the spring cylinder 
cover before removing the_ spring compressor block. 

To dismount the shield: Disconnect the apron by pulling the hinge 
pins, remove the bolts fastening the main shield to the trail, take 
off the main shield braces and main shield side plates, and lift the 
shield plate off to the rear. 

To dismount the cradle: Remove the gun, shield and elevating pin, 
take off the trunnion caps, and lift the cradle from the pintle yoke. 



63 

To dismount the traversing gear: Remove the bolts securing the 
traversing screw bracket to the trail; the screw may then be dis- 
engaged from the nut and taken out with the bracket, bearing, and 
cap; the nut and traversing screw bearings are freed by removing 
their cap bolts. In assembling, the oil plugs in the bearing and the 
traversing nut are to be placed on top. 

To dismount the elevating screws: Remove the elevating pin; un- 
screw the inner screw by hand; remove the elevating screw cover; 
remove the outer screw by screwing it down through the elevating- 
gear bracket. 

To dismount the pinions and bevel gear: Remove the split pin in 
the pinion hub, after which the pinion shaft may be withdrawn and 
the pinion removed from its seat. The bevel gear may then be 
removed by dismounting the screws, as above. 

To dismount the elevating gear bracket: Free the mechanism from 
the cradle by removing the elevating pin; dismount the pinions and 
pinion shafts as above; remove the five bolts attaching either ele- 
vating yoke side to the traversing bracket and elevating transom; 
the bracket may now be slipped free from the other side of the yoke. 

To assemble the elevating mechanism: The operations just described 
are reversed . The following should be noted : The pinions are a close 
fit on their shafts, and especial care should be taken not to burr the 
parts in assembling. As the outer screw is being assembled in the 
gear bracket from below, the bevel gear should be put in place with 
its keys engaging the keyways of the screw. Before attaching the 
inner screw to the cradle both screws should be run down to be sure 
that the upper end of the outer screw is flush with the face of the 
gear bracket when the inner screw is clear in and its head in position 
to engage the cradle and that the lug on the elevating bevel gear func- 
tions properly against the elevating bevel gear stop on the rear cradle 
band or the lug integral with the band. If this condition is not ful- 
filled, the mechanism may not give the maximum elevation for which 
it is designated and will not house properly in traveling nor will the 
elevating and traversing lock function correctly. 

To dismount the tire brake: Disconnect the brake rods by pulling 
the pins in the beams and taking the nuts from the cranks; m reas- 
sembling, the rods will be first assembled to the cranks and then 
in the beams. To remove the beams from the pintle bearings it is 
necessary to dismount the recoil cylinder to get out the hinge pins; 
the brake shoe is freed from the beam by withdrawing the brake 
shoe pin. The brake beams with shoes attached are rights and 
lefts and are properly assembled when the shoe has a full bearing 
upon the tire. To take out the brake shaft, remove the left wheel 
and the pin of the right crank; the shaft and left crank may be pulled 
out to the left. In assembling the shaft, note that the cranks are 
to be in line, with the brake lever and hinge opposite them on the 
shaft. The tension of the brake rod spring is regulated by removing 
the split pin which passes through the brake spring cover and screw- 
ing the brake spring cover end in or out of the cover. The tension 
of the spring is increased by screwing the end into the cover. The 



64 

length of the brake rod should be adjusted by screwing the front 
end of the rod into or out of the brake rod end. 

To adjust the brakes: The brake rods are disconnected from the 
brake beams. The brake shoes are placed with the clearance from 
the tire desired and the brake lever with the brake lever catch engag- 
ing the forward notch (extreme released position) . The length of the 
brake rods should then be adjusted to correspond. Should test show 
that one shoe bears harder on the wheel than the other, the rod of 
the latter should be shortened. 

To dismount the band brake: First jack up carriage and remove the 
left wheel. Then draw the split pin, located at middle of brake 
shaft, which holds the brake lever sleeve on the brake shaft, draw 
the split pins on the ends of the brake shaft, unscrew the crown nuts, 
slide off the brake band ends lower, which will draw with them the 
adjusting bolt eyes with their bushings and the four brake cranks. 
The brake shaft may then be drawn through the brake shaft bracket 
and the band guides removed from the band clips. 

To adjust the band brakes: Remove the pin holding the adjusting 
bolt sleeve in the brake band end (upper) ; then free the adjusting 
bolt sleeve and screw it up or down on the adjusting bolt eye^ till, 
with the brake lever in the extreme released position, there is no 
friction between the brake drums and brake linings. ^ On applying 
the brakes there should be the same amount of friction on each 
drum; if such is not the case the adjusting bolt sleeve of the one 
having the least friction should be tightened till the friction on 
both is equal. 

To remove a wheel: Support the axle in order to bring the wheel clear 
of the ground . Lift up the flap of the hub latch, thus disengaging its 
bolt, and unscrew the hub cap; the wheel fastening which is now 
exposed is secured to the axle by a spring pin in one side ; when this 
is pressed back the wheel fastening may be lifted free of the axle and 
the wheel slipped off. 

To remove a hub liner: Take the wheel from the axle and drive the 
liner out by striking with a heavy hammer or sledge upon a suitable 
wooden or metal block placed against the small end of the liner. A 
hub liner driving tool is carried on the artillery supply truck for this 
purpose. In assembling a new liner be sure the surfaces are per- 
fectly clean and that no dirt gets under the flange of the liner to pre- 
vent its being driven solidly against the face of the hub . Unless the 
liner is forced completely into the hub the distance from the face 
of liner to the small end of the hub may be too great to allow the 
assemblage of the wheel fastening. Should the outer end of the liner 
project beyond the small end of the hub it may be filed flush. 

To dismount the traversing bracket and pintle yoke: The gun, cradle, 
and main shield being off, dismount the traversing screw and ele- 
vating pinion shafts, withdraw the bolts connecting the traversing 
bracket and pintle shape; the bracket may be withdrawn forward, 
the pintle yoke given one-sixth of a turn and lifted from the pintle 
bearing. 

To dismount the trail and axle: The wheels, shield, cradle, brake, 
etc., having been removed as described above, remove the clamping 



65 

bolts from the brake shaft brackets, slip the brackets off the axle, 
and loosen the clamping bolts in the axle bearings; the axle may 
then be withdrawn from the trail. 

The parts of this carriage in general are made with sufficient clear- 
ance to permit of the assemblage of any part without the use of force. 
In assembling them no part should be directly struck with a ham- 
mer. If resort to force is necessary, a piece of wood or a copper drift 
should be interposed between the_ hammer and the part struck. 
Most cf the nuts and pins are provided with split pins as keepers. 
The split pins must, of course, be removed to remove the nut, and 
when the nut or pin is assembled the split pin should be inserted 
and properly opened. When bolts are removed it is a good plan to 
screw the nuts back on the bolts to keep the threads of both clean 
and undamaged until they are restored to the carriage. A pair of 
wire-cutting pliers is provided for use in pulling split pins, cutting 
wire lashings, etc. 

CARE AND CLEANING CF RECOIL CYLINDER AND OTHER PARTS OP 
THE CARRIAGE. 

The carriage is a machine for controlling the recoil of the gun, and 
must be properly cleaned and cared for to insure its wording cor- 
rectly. The officers responsible for the efficiency of the lattery 
should familiarize themselves with the carriage mechanism and with 
the foregoing instructions as to the methods of mounting and de- 
mounting the various parts, and should see that the carriage is prop- 
erly handled, cleaned, and cared for. The following general direc- 
tions for its care and cleaning are given: 

The recoil cylinder should be emptied and refilled once every three 
months, and thoroughly cleaned once every six months, or oftener 
if the conditions require it. The cylinder is most readily emptied 
and filled when removed from the carriage. For cleaning, it is dis- 
mounted and the cylinder head, counter recoil buffer, and piston 
red removed, as heretofore described. The interior of the cylinder, 
the piston, the counter recoil buffer, and the stuffing box should 
then be thoroughly cleaned by the use of cotton waste and kerosepe 
oil and wiped dry with, cotton waste. The removal of the packing is 
not necessaryin cleaning the stuffing box. The cylinder bore should 
be carefully inspected, and if any rust has formed it should be re- 
moved with kerosene oil, using, if necessary, fine emery clotlu. The 
latter must be used with great care to prevent any increase in the 
clearance between the cylinder and piston. If rubbing, burring, or 
scoring of the parts is noted, the rough spots should be carefully 
smoothed down by a skilled workman with a dead-smooth, file, pr 
with emery cloth, and the cause of the roughness ascertained; and 
removed. Where unusual rubbing or scoring has occurred,, the facts 
will be reported to the officer of the Ordnance Department charged 
with the duty of keeping the battery in repair, for his information 
and action. . *.'....■' .'. \> , 

The "parts should be reassembled immediately after .cleaning, aijd 
inspection and the cylinder filled with the hydroline oil issued for 

49877°— 18 5 



66 

that purpose. The piston should be moved back and forth in the 
cylinder by hand to make sure that all parts are correctly assembled 
and are without interference. The cylinder should then be mounted 
in the carriage and the gun pulled from battery by hand, using the 
Duplex chain block and the retracting eye carried on the artillery 
supply truck and permitted to counter recoil rapidly to insure 
that all parts are in proper position for firing. This should never be 
done, however, unless the cylinder is known to be filled with oil. In 
reassembling the parts the condition of the fiber washer between 
cylinder head and recoil cylinder should be noted; it should be 
replaced whenever necessary to prevent leakage. In removing and 
inserting the piston rod care should be taken to keep it central in 
the cylinder, so as not to bind, burr, or spring any parts. The dis- 
mounting and reassembling of the parts of the cylinder should in 
every case be supervised by a commissioned officer. Before firing, 
an inspection should be made to ascertain that the different parts, 
especially the piston rod and spring rod plug nuts, are correctly 
assembled. 

The recoil cylinder oil should be stored in the closed cans provided 
for the purpose, and be carefully protected from dirt, sand, or water. 
Oil withdrawn from cylinders and containing any sediment must 
not be used again for any purpose until it has been allowed to settle 
for not less than 24 hours. When sediment has thus been permitted 
to settle, great care must be taken not to disturb it in removing the 
oil. To insure the cleanliness of all cylinder oil it should be strained 
through a clean piece of linen or muslin before using. 

The counter recoil springs should be dismounted at least once 
every six months and be thoroughly cleaned. All rust should be 
removed and the springs well oiled before assemblage. When the 
Bprings are dismounted the interiors of the cradle should be cleaned 
and examined for defective riveting, missing rivet heads, and 
scoring. The stirrups should be carefully examined for bulged or 
cracked ends and loose rivets, and all burrs or scores on the bronze 
heads carefully smoothed off. 

The recoil guide rails of the cradle should be kept well lubricated. 
Immediately before beginning to fire, they should be oiled through 
all the oil holes of the gun. Lack of proper lubrication of these 
guide rails is the most frequent cause of failure of gun to return fully 
into battery. 

The elevating and traversing mechanisms should be dismounted 
at least once every six months for thorough cleaning and over- 
hauling. They should be kept well oiled and should work easily. 
If at any time either mechanism works harder than usual it should 
be immediately overhauled and the cause discovered and removed. 

In traveling the cradle should be locked to the trail by means of 
the elevating and traversing lock, so as to relieve the pointing mech- 
anisms of all travel stresses. 

The wheels and wheel fastenings should be dismounted periodi- 
cally and the fastenings, hub boxes, axle arms, and axle bore cleaned 
and examined. All roughness due to scoring or cutting should be 



67 

smoothed off. In oiling the wheels in service a small quantity (about 
1 gill) of lubricating oil should be placed in the axle bore through 
the oil valve in the hub cap. A short experience will enable the 
battery commander to determine how often the wheels should be 
oiled. 

The nuts on the hub bolts should be tightened monthly the first 
year of service and twice a year thereafter. The ends of the bolts 
should be lightly riveted over to prevent the nut from unscrewing. 
When the hub bolts are tightened, the hub band should be screwed 
up as tightly as possible against the lock washer at the outer end of 
tne wheel hook bushing. 

The wooden parts of the wheels are made of thoroughly seasoned 
materials, and the hub bolts and bands, when the wheels are issued, 
are properly tightened ; but all wood is susceptible to change with 
atmospheric conditions, so that the spokes speedily become loose, 
and if the wheel is used in this condition it will rapidly be made 
unserviceable and may be damaged beyond repair. 

The importance of strict compliance with these instructions can not be 
overestimated. 

All working and bearing surfaces of the carriage require oiling; 
those not directly accessible for this purpose are provided with oil 
holes closed by spring covers or bronze pings. Each component 
part of a carriage is made interchangeable with the similar parts of 
other carriages of the same model, except that certain p rts are not 
interchangeable between carriages with serial numbers from 1 to 40, 
inclusive, and those with numbers above 40, as noted in the table of 
nomenclature of parts, page — , and is, except in the ca^e of certain 
springs and very small parts, stamped with an individual symbol 
number and letter; this symbol may be followed by an additional 
number which indicates a slight change in design from the original. 
"When requisitions for replacements are to be made the symbol should, 
be copied, thereon exactly as stamped upon the unserviceable piece. 

THE 4.7-INCH GUN AND 6-INCH HOWITZER LIMBER, 
MODEL OF 1905. 

(This limber is common to the 4.7-inch gun and 6-inch howitzer batteries.) 

WEIGHTS, DIMENSIONS, ETC. 

Weight, complete, including spare connecting pole, .pounds. . 1, 750 
Weight, with 4.7-inch gun and carriage, model of 1906. do. . . 9, 818 

Diameter of wheels (rubber tired) .inches. 1 51 

Width of track .do. ... 60 

Free height under limber and carriage. ..... .... .do 16, 8 



68 



NOMENCLATURE OF PARTS. 





Name cf part. 


Location, eto. 


rr-nerty ! 
classification. 




Class. 


Sop-, 
tisn.' 


1 


Axle 




, iv 


■'•' 


7, 


Bucket holders 


Riveted to side braces 




4 


Bucket straps 


T n stran fasteners 




8 


Bucket strap fasteners, Style 
No. 1. 


Rivited to bucket holders 

Under axle 








do 








Over axle 






Clio 


Braces top carriage rail at center . 
Bearing for doubletree 






Doubletree pivot strap 






On underside of pintle bearing. . 
On right side of pole housing 

Through pintle bearing 1 . . . 


j 










Pintle, comolete, consisting 
of— 
Pintle 


■■■> 






In lower end of pintle 


. i 




Key 


In side of pintle 








On lower end of nintle 








In urnoer end of pintle 






Pintle bearing 


Riveted to rear ends of center 
angles and center angle plate. 

Through pintle 






ing rf— 
Pintle bolt 






Pintle-b It lever 


On lower end of pintle bolt 

Snaps into eye rivet 














Holds pintle bolt in locked posi- 
tion. 

Through hole in end of pintle- 
bolt i ever. 








3 




Pole bracket,left 








Riveted to pole bracket, left. .... 
Over rear of pole socket 






Pole bracket reinforce, left — 
Pole bracketreinforce, right. . . 








Secures pole in socket 








JRiveted to side brace,left . . : 

In strap fasteners 


i 
















Pole prop strap fasteners, 
style No. 2. 

Pole socket, complete, con- 
sisting of— 


Riveted to side brace, left 

Hinges in pole brackets 


:•' 










Pole socket clamp 


Riveted to pole socket body 

Over end of pole socket body 

Riveted to top of pole socket 

body. 
Under rear of pole socket 

[Brace top carriage rail at sides. . 






Pole socket reinforce. 






Rail bracket, left 


























Spare connecting pole bracket 

(front). 
Spare connecting pole bracket 

(front) upper strap. 






1 


Riveted to spare connecting pole 

bracket (front). 





69 



Nomenclature of parts — Continued. 



Name cf part. 



Location, etc. 



Property 
classification. 



Class. 



Sec- 
tion. 



pole 



Spare connecting pole support 
M complete, consisting of— 
Spare connecting pole 

support (lower >. 
Spare connecting 
support (upper \ 
Spare ' connecting pole 

support pin. 
Chain , with bolt snap and 
two rings. 

Chain rivet , 

Ton carriage, complete, con- 
sisting of— 

Top carriage 

Top carriage clips 

Rollers 

Roller pins 

Top carriage rail 

Wheels, 51-inch rubber tired 
complete , including— 

Hub boxes 

Hubrings 

Hub liners 

Hub bands 



Hinged to spare connecting pole 

support (upper). 
Bolted to frame in front of pintle . 

Locks pole support (lower) in 
position. 

In end of connecting pole sup- 
port pin. 

In pole support (lower) 



Turns in pintle bearing 

Bolted to top carriage 

On roller pins 

Tinned in top carriage 

Bearing for top carriage rollers . . 



Lock washers 

Wheel hooks— 

lritfit 

Heft 

Wheel hook bushings 

Hubcaps 

Hub latches complete 

Hub latch snrings 

Hub latch plungers 

Wheel oil valves, complete 

Oil valve springs 

Oil valve rivets 

Oil valve washers 

Spokes, 16 right, 16 left . . . 

Felloe segment, bent. with 

16 bolts and washers. 

Felloe bands 

Base bands 

Tires, rubber 

Spoke shoes and rivets 

Spoke shoe nlates 

Carriage bolts and nuts . . . 

Wheel fastenings, com- 
plete, including — 

Wheel fastenings 

Wheel fastening plungers . 
Wheelfastening springs. . . 
Wheelfasteningplugs. 



Outer flanges of hubs 

Forced into hub boxes 

Screwed on hub boxes between 

wheel hook bushing and hub 

cans. 
On end of axle 



[On outside of hubs 

Under wheel hooks 

On end of hubs 

Actuate hub latch plungers . 



Lock hub caps in place. 
Slide in hub caps 



) IV 



Bolted to felloe bands . 



Bolted to felloe segments 

Shrunk over felloe bands 

On base bands 

Hold spokes to felloes 

Between spokes and felloes 

Clamp spokes betweenhub boxes 
and rings. 



At ends of axles 



70 

DESCRIPTION. 

(Plate XVIII.) 

The carriage limber is designed to be used with the connecting 
pole for attachment to a tractor and to support the trail in traveling. 
The principal parts are the wheels, axle, frame, top carriage, pole 
socket, and connecting pole. The limber is made of metal through- 
out, wood being used only in the spokes and felloes of the wheels. 

The top carriage is formed for use with the trails of either the 
4.7-inch gun carriage, model of 1906, or the 6-inch howitzer carriage. 
The trail of the carriage rests on the top carriage of the limber. 
When the limber is turning a corner the top carriage revolves about 
the pintle center, rolling on the top carriage rail of the limber frame. 

A wide flange steel center angle plate is riveted to the axle as a 
middle rail, and with the braces of heavy steel angles underneath 
and at the sides forms a trussed frame for the vehicle. Sixteen 
inches to the rear of the axle a bronze bearing for the pintle is solidly 
riveted between the rear ends of the center angle plate and center 
angles. Forward, these converge with the side braces and form a 
yoke in which the pole socket may oscillate in a vertical plane. 
The front ends of this yoke are connected by the riveted doubletree 
pivot strap. A seat for the doubletree is formed on the top of the 
doubletree pivot strap; the doubletree pivot is screwed into this seat 
and projects up through the doubletree; its upper end is threaded 
for a crown nut and is braced back to the pole housing, a flange steel 
part which constrains the pole socket in its vertical plane and limits 
the upward movement of its rear end. The pole socket is of flange 
steel with its forward end split and furnished with a clamp bolt for 
drawing firmly about the connecting pole. The doubletree, single- 
trees and pole complete are omitted for motorized batteries and a 
connecting pole is used in their place. 

The pole pin passes through pole brackets and pole bracket rein- 
forces, riveted on each side of the yoke, and the clamp forging of the 
socket, securing the socket to the frame. Between the pole housing 
and the pole stop the socket may swing through an angle of abqut 
31° with the socket pin as an axis. This pivoting of the pole is 
necessary, as the entire limber body rotates about the axle in passing 
over uneven ground. 

The top carriage rail is a steel angle bent to the arc of a circle and 
located on the frame with the center of the arc at the pintle center. 
It is riveted to the side braces by the rail brackets and to the center 
angle plate by a suitable clip. 

The top carriage is a steel casting. Its rear end fits in the bearing 
of the frame and is bored to receive the steel pintle, a heavy pin 
with a long head of elliptical section, keyed in with the major axis 
of the ellipse on the center line of the top carriage. The pintle bolt 
in the center of the pintle has an elliptical head to match the pintle 
and at its lower end a lever with chain and snap fastening. When 
a carriage is to be limbered, the bolt is turned until its elliptical 
head coincides with the pintle so that both may enter the elliptical 



71 

lunette transom bushing of the carriage trail; once so entered the 
pintle bolt is turned 9(r in the pintle and secured by its chain in 
that position, the head thus preventing the disengagement of pintle 
and lunette. 

The front end of the top carriage is provided with three bronze 
conical rollers which rest and run on the top carriage rail; and with 
clips which embrace the edge of the rail to prevent accidental dis- 
mounting. There is also a spur located on the top of the top carriage 
which enters the trail end reinforce plate of the carriage and holds 
the trail and top carriage in line % 

The wheels are 51 inches in diameter, with rubber tires 4 inches 
wide. The hubs are exactly similar and interchangeable with those 
in the wheels of the carriage. The axle is hollow and is made from a 
single piece of forged steel. 

A bucket holder with straps is located on each side brace for carry- 
ing the four canvas watering buckets. A name plate is riveted to 
the left side of the pole housing, giving number, name of limber, 
model, name of manufacturer, year of completion, and initials of 
inspector. In all reports and correspondence, the limber should be 
designated by the number, name, model, etc., as given on the name plate. 
As repairs to the limber may from time to time be required, the 
parts needed should be referred to by the names given in the nomen- 
clature of parts, and the symbols should be copied exactly as stamped 
upon the unserviceable pieces. 

THE 4.7-INCH GUN CAISSON MODEL OF 1916 (BAND BRAKE 
AND TIRE BRAKE). 

WEIGHTS, DIMENSIONS, ETC. 

Weight of caisson, empty, without implements or ammu- 
nition pounds.. 2, 565 

Weight of implements carried, including spare connecting 

pole ._ pounds. . 180 

Weight of ammunition carried .do. . . . 2, 067 

Weight of caisson, complete equiped and loaded do. . . . 4, 812 

Rounds of ammunition carried. .... 28 

Diameter of wheels inches. . 61 

Width of track. .do 60 

Free height under caisson. .do 20, 8 



72 



NOMENCLATURE OF PARTS. 



Num- 
ber on 


Name of part. 


Location, etc. 


Property 
classifica- 
tion. 


jaisson. 


Class. 


Sec- 
tion. 


2 


Adjusting bolt ' 


Tinned to braVe shaft le~er 

Connects front and middle 
diaphragms. 

Hinged to chest bottom 

Riveted to apron 


) IV 




28 
1 


Ammunition chest con- 
necting piece. 
Apron 




3 


Apron hinge, male 




3 
2 

2 


Apron hinge, female 

Apron latches, complete, 
including— 
Latch bodies 


Riveted to chest bottom 

I On latch bases riveted to chest 
1 sides. 
) 
Riveted to aprcn 




2 


Plungers 




2 
2 


Latch handles with pins . 




2 


Apron latch staple 




2 


Apron latch washer 






1 


Ax handle bracket 


Riveted to top of chest 

do 




1 


Ax pocket 




1 


Axle 


In axle bearing 




2 


Axle bearing 


Riveted to sides of chest 

Riveted en inside rf chest 

On brake shaft and in brake 

band end, upper. 
do 




8 
2 

2 


Axle bearing reinforce plate 
Band bearing, inner * 

Band bearing, outer * 

Band clip * 




2 


Riveted to sides of chest 

Riveted to brake band 

Riveted to brake band ends. . . 

Riveted to brake band 

Screw into adjusting bolt 

Tits bushings on brake shaft 
ends. 

[Hinged to brackets en rear cf 
j chest. 

Riveted to rear plato 




2 






2 


BrakeTband * 




2 


Brake band lining x 




2 

2 

2 

2 
2 
2 
2 
4 
2 


Brake band end, lower, 1 

right, 1 left. 1 
Brake band end, upper, 1 

right, 1 left.* 
Brake beams, complete, in- 
cluding— a 

Bodies 2 

Brake beam clips 2 

Brake beam stiiTeners 2 . . 
Brake shoe bearings 2 . . . 

Brake beam hinges 2 

Brake beam bracket 2 


3 


2 


Hinges beams to brackets 

On rignt end of brake shaft .... 




1 
2 


Brake crank with washer 2 . . 




1 


Brake guard 2 


Riveted to left side of chest 

On 1 eft end of brake shaft 

do 




1 
1 


Brake lever, with washer 2 . . 




1 




Riveted to brake lever 

Riveted to brake lever and 
brake lever hook. 

Riveted to brake lever 

Riveted to left side of chest 

Riveted to brake lever rest — 


1 


1 


do.i 

Brake lever hook 1 




1 


Brake lever rest 2 




1 


Brake lever rest spring 2 






1 


Brake lever stop rivet » 


and supports. 





J For band brake model only. 



2 For tire brake model only. 



73 

Nomnenclatwre of parts— Continued. 



Num- 
ber on 


Name of part. 


Location, etc. 


Property 
classifica- 
tion. 


caisson. 


Class. 


Sec- 
tion. 


2 
2 


Brake red, complete, in- 
cluding — * 


Attached to brake crank and 
brake lever and to the brake 
beams. 

In brake shaft bearings pass- 
ing througa chest. 
do 

Riveted to sides of chest 

Riveted to left side cf bracket. . 

Bolted to brake shaft bearing 
bracket 

Riveted to right side of chest. . 

Fits on brake shaft ends 

On brake beams 


, IV 




2; 


Brake rod key l 




2 
2 
2' 
2| 
2) 
1 


Brake rod end with pin 1 

Brake rod bushing 1 

Brake rod spring 1 

Brake spring cover * 

Brake spring cover end * 
Brake shaft 2 




1! 
2J 
1 
1 

l! 
2 


do.i 

Brake shaft bearing 1 

Brake shaft bearing, bracket 2 
Brake shaft bearing, left a . . . 

Brake shaft bearing, right 2 . 
Brake shaft lever 2 




2j 


Brake shoe * 




1 


Bushing 2 


In brake shaft bearing, left 

In brake shaft bearing, right. . 
Riveted to rear plate 




1 : 


do 2 




1 


Bucket holder bedy 

Box slide, 1 right, 1 left 

Caisson prop, complete, in- 
cluding— 
Prop tubes 




2 
1 
2 


Riveted to lower intermediate 
plate, left side. 

Under connecting polo 

On right side of chest 




1 


Prop foot 




2 


Prop eyes 


3 


2 
1 


Prop chain clamp 

Prop hook 




2 


Prop chain 




1 


Cartridge hook: bracket 




1 


do 




1 


Chest angle 


Riveted arcund chest ct rear.^ 




1 


Chest body, upper and 

lower plates. 
Chest door, lower 




1 


Hinged to bottom front cf : 

chest. 
Hinged to top front cf chest 

Keyed to connecting pole 
socket. 

Connects connecting pole to 

socket. 
Riveted tointermediate plates. 




1 


Chest door, upper 




1 
1 


Connecting pole, complete, 
including— 
Body 




1 






1 


Lunette 




1 
2 

1 


Lunette bearing 

Lunette pins, 1 front, 1 

rear. 
Prop saddle 




1 
1 


Connecting pole key 

Connecting pole socket 





i For tire brake model only. 



2 For band brake model only. 



74 

Nomenclature of parts — Continued. 



Name of part. 



Coupling sleeve 1 .... 

Diaphragm brace 

Door angle (for upper chest ) 
Door angle Cfor lower chest) 
Door end stiffener, 1 right, 

1 left. 
Doorhandle, lower, 1 right, 

Heft. 

Door hinge, male 

Door hinge, female 

Door prop 



Door handle bar (upper) 

Doorhandle base (upper).. 

Door prop bracket 

Door prop guide, 1 right, 1 

left. 

Door prop pin 

Door prop sliding rivet 

Door stiffener, lower chest . . 
Door stiffener, upper chest, 

2 right, 2 left. 
Filler plate.! 



Footrest 

Foot rest support, 1 right, 

Heft. 

Front diaphragm, lower 

Front diaphragm, upper... . 
Fuze box holder (front 

door). 
Fuze box support (front 

door). 
Fuze box strap (between 

chests). 

Handle, 1 right, Heft 

Hrndle catch 

Handle catch bearing, 1 

right, 1 left. 

Handle catch rivet 

Handrail shank 

Handrail 

Hatchet blade bracket, 

body. 
Hatchet blade bracket , han- 
dle rest. 

Hatchet handle bracket 

Intermediate plate, lower. . . 

1 Intermediate plate, upper . . 



Location, etc. 



On brake lever sleeve 

Rivet to upper diaphragms 

Stiffens edges of door 

do 

Riveted to lower door , 



.do. 



Fastened to upper door and 
chest sides. 

On front of door. 

....do 

Riveted to upper doer 

Riveted to chest sides 



Property 
classifica- 
tion. 



Class. 



tion. 



E iveted to lower d oor 

Riveted to upper door 

Riveted to pintle bearing sup- 
port. 
Riveted to foot rest supports . . 
Riveted on rear plate 

Riveted in front of chest 

....do 

Riveted to fuze box support. . . 



Riveted to upper door 

Riveted to lower intermediate 
plate. 

On lock bars .-. 

In handle catch bearing 

On sides of chest 



In handle catch bearing 

Riveted on chest sides 

Forced and riveted en shanks. 
Riveted to left side of chest.... 

..-.do .. 



.do. 



Riveted in chest parallel to 

bottom below axle. 
Riveted in chest parallel to 

bottom above axle. 



IV 



1 For band brake model only. 



75 

Nomenclature of parts — Continued. 



Name of part. 



Location, etc. 



Property 
classifica- 
tion. 



Class. 



Sec- 
tion. 



Lantern bracket, complete, 
including — 

Lantern bracket body. . 

Lantern bracket bot- 
tom. 

Lantern strap fastener. 

Lantern strap 

Latch base, 1 right, Heft 

Lock bar 

Lock bar bracket, 1 right 
Heft. 

Lock bar pin 

Lock bar washers 

Lockinglever 

Locking lever bearing 

Middle diaphragm, lower . . . 
Middle diaphragm, upper. . . 
Name plate 



On rear of chest. 



Riveted on sides of chest . 

On chest front 

On sides of chest 



Forced in lock bar. 



On front of chest. 
....do 



Nutstrip 

Oil can guide, 1 right, 1 left 
Oil can lock 



Oil can stop plate and 4 

washers. 
Padlock, bolt snap, clevis 

and chain rivet. 

Pick handle rest 

Fickrest 

Pintle 

Pintle bearing 



Pintle bearing bolt . 



On rear of chest by lantern 

bracket. 

Secure pintle bearing boltr. 

On intermediate plate, lower.. 
Riveted to lower door handle, 

right. 
Riveted between intermediate 

plates. 
On left side of chest 



Pintle bearing support, 

lower. 
Pintle bearing support, 

upper. 

Pintlelatch 

Pintle latch pin 

Pintle latch spring 

Pintle spring 



Pintle spring guide 

Plate, lock bar, 1 right, 1 

left. 
Pole socket key bracket. . . 

Poplar block 

Rear diaphragm, lower 



I Rear diaphragm, upper. 



....do 

....do 

In pintle bearings 

Bolted to pintle bearing 

supports. 
Through pintle bearings and 

supports. 
Riveted to lower intermediate 

plate. 
Riveted toupper intermediate 

plate. 

On pintle 

Through pintle and latch 

On pintle latch 

Held by pintle spring guide 

and bolt. 
Riveted to pintle support, 

lower. 
On sides of chest 



rv 



On right side of chest . 

For oil can stop. 

Inside chest parallel to rear 

plate. 
do 



76 



Nomenclature of parts — Continued. 



Num- 
ber en 



Name of part. 



Rear plate 

Reinforce plate, 

1 upper. 
Segment rack l . . 



1 lower, 



Segment rack support, 

front.* 
Segment rack support , rear 1 . 

Segment rack 2 

Separator (x=2.625)2 



Separator (x=2.875)2.. 

Shovel handle rest 

Shovel support 

Spare connecting pole, clip. 

Spare connecting pole, 
bracket. 

Spare connecting pole, 
bracket band. 

Spare connecting pole, sup- 
port. 

Staples, lock bar 

Steel angle, 1 by 1 by 0.125.. 

Strap fastener bar 

Wheel bearing roller 

Wheels, 61-inch rubber 
tired, complete. 



Location, etc. 



Riveted to chest angle. . . ...... 

Riveted with pintle bearing 
supports. 

Riveted to segment rack sup- 
ports. 

Riveted to chest, left side 



.do. 
.do. 



Separates brake guard from 

chest. 
....do 



On right side of chest. 
do 



On top of chest. 



On chest sides 

For oil can stop 

Riveted on upper door 

On connecting pole socket 

See wheels under carriage for 
nomenclature. 



Property 
classifica- 
tion. 



Class. 



IV 



i For band brake model otiiy. 



2 For tire brake model only. 



DESCRIPTION. 

(Plates XIX and XX.) 

The caisson, model of 1916, is a two-wheeled vehicle with armored 
ammunition chest for the transportation of ammunition for the 
4.7-inch gun. This model is rubber tired and has either tire or band 
brakes. 

The principle parts are the wheels, axle, ammunition chest, pintle, 
brake, connecting pole socket, and connecting pole. 

The wheels and wheel fastenings are the same as and interchange- 
able to those on the carriage. 

The axle is fastened to the shaft by axle bearings riveted to the 
chest sides. The rivets passing through the intermediate plates, 
the middle and end diaphragm as well as the sides. 

The body in two pieces of San^e steel is riveted to the chest angle, 
forming the top, bottom, and sides of the chest. The rear of the 



BRAKE SPRING COVER END 




BUCKET HOLDLER 

BRAKE ROD 

BRAKE ROD END— 1 
'—BRAKE BEAM 

LANTERN BRACKET 

PINTLE 

FOOT REST 

PINTLE BEARING BOLT 

PAULIN STRAP 
rAX POCKET 

BRAKE SHOE 
,| (BRAKE SHOE PIN 
llHATCHET BLADE BRACKET! 



/ 



. BRAKE LEVER 

FOOT REST SUPPORT 
'BRAKE LEVER CATCH 
' 3RAKE SEGMENT RACK 
'BRAKE GUARD 
^GRIP STRAP 
-BRAKE SPRING COVER 
-BRAKE SHAFT BEARING 



36-2-/06 



RL^fTEisns: 



4.7 INCH CAISSON 
MODEL OF 1916 TIRE! BRAKE! 



SHOVEL SUPPORT 

01 L CAN 

LOCK BAR - - 




BRAKE LEVER 
lOTREST SUPP0S1 
" LEVCR CATCH 
SEGMENT RACK 
GUARD 
STRAP 

I'i7\|-.| 'ill' HVIK 

llllAl.' Ml/11 I HI AKINl, 



"—IS. (To face : 



4.7 INCH GUN C^ISSOf 
MQPEL OF 1916 



c^rtripge hook str.ar chest pc 

\ PROMT PI/JPHE/3GM / '" 



\ intermepwte 

\ PLATE, UPPER / 



/ /INTERMEP 

// 1 




LOCK QrtR. \ 
^LOCKING LEVERS 



/SHOVEL SUPPORT POOR. HANPLES 
CHE.ST POOfZ LOWER. 



49877°— 18.- (To face p, 77,) 



77 

client is formed of armor plate and with the armor plate upper door 
and apron furnishes protection for the ammunition servers from small 
arms and shrapnel fires. Inside, two intermediate plates parallel 
•tq the. bottom are riveted to the connecting pole socket, pintle 
bearing supports, reinforce plates, diaphragms, and che3t sides. 
TTpper, front, rear, and middle and lower front, rear, and middle 
diaphragms are riveted parallel to the rear plate. The upper ones 
have 21 holes each, and the lower 7 holes each, which are in, exact 
alignment. Corresponding holes in the front and middle diaphragms 
have brass tubes, cut awayat the top to save weight, connecting 
them. These connecting pieces support the front end of the car- 
tridge case, serve to guide the projectiles and to carry empty cases. 
The front end of the connecting piece is turned over the front face 
of the flange of the perforations in the front diaphragm and forms a 
stop for the rim of the cartridge case. The chest doors clcse against 
the heads of the cases so that the cartridges are held firmly in posi- 
tion. Suitable clearances are cut in the flange of each cartridge 
pocket to enable the cartridge hook to get back of the rim of the case 
■in withdrawing it from the chest. The chest doors open to the 
front. The lower door is hinged to the bottom of the chest, the upper 
to the top of the chest and by means of a lock bar, locking levers 
and handle, the doors are locked. The upper door is used as a 
shield held up at about 45° by the door prop. 

The apron of armor plate is hinged to the bottom of the caisson 
so that when traveling it may be swung backward against the bot- 
tom where it is held by latches on the chest sides. A padlock and 
key marked "Ammunition," that has the same kind of key as any 
other one marked "Ammunition," allows the opening of any 
caisson by anyone having an "Ammunition" key. 

The connecting pole socket is^ riveted to the upper and lower 
intermediate plates, as are the pintle bearing supports, upper and 
lower, and the upper and lower reinforce plates. The connecting 
pole is secured to its socket by the connecting pole key. At the 
front of the connecting pole socket are two wheel-bearing rollers. 
The pintle bearings bolt to their supports thus furnishing means for 
renewing the bronze pintle bearings. The pintle latch is opened 
by.the lunette in entering it but must be closed, by hand. 

The connecting pole has a body of steel tubing with its rear end 

finished to fit the connecting pole socket and is provided with a key 

: bearing; its front is fitted with a lunette bearing in which a lunette 

is .secured by two pins. Ontita bottom of theconnecting pole is a 

£rop saddle to which a prop is pivoted so that it may be raised and 
eld so by a chain in traveling. 

On the tire brake model^ brake beam brackets are riveted to the 
end of the chest at the height of the axle. The brake beams are 
pinned to them and by the same kind of leverage system as on the 
carriage the brake shoes are brought to bear on the tire by pressure 
on the brake lever. The brake lever and segment are on the left side 
of the chest. The adjustment of the brake shoe is the same as on 



PL/rrEixx: 



4.7 INCH GUN CAISSON 
MOPEL OF I9I<S 



C/qRTRIPGE HOOK STR-4P 
\ FRONT PMPHR/IGM / 
\ IISTERMEPWTE 
\ PL/TTE, UPPER / 



\feoc 
~o©c 



CHEST POOR UPPER 
I POOR. HflNPLE UPPER 
//'INTERMEPMTE FL^TE LOWER 




fuze: box 

ew-ip clip — -~ 

b/3np guipe h""~-~- . 

BR/^KE B^NP -V.:~~l-Vj : . 

HATCHET BL/3PE BR/3CKET 
AK hMNPLE BR/=ICKET..^ 
PICK H^NPLE REST^ "^ 
POOR PROP BRACKET'"-., 




LOCK B^R \ 
.LOCKING LEVER, 
POOR hMNPLES I&WER 



/IX POCKET 



sr^ke lever 

,BR/=IKE BrflNP LIMING 
-BR-4KE LEVER C4TCH 
.5E6MEMT R/3CK 
BR/3KE SH/qFT 
,x BEARING BRACKET 

brake: b^iup enr upper 

.BR^KE Sf-WFT 
BR/3KE SH^FT 
' BE^IRING.LEFT 
-PINTLE BEARING BOLTS 
-PINTLE L/=ITCH 
PINTLE 

PINTLE BEARING 
PINTLE BEARING 

SUPPORT 
BRflKE SH^FT LEVER 
»PJUSTING BOLT 
QR^KE B/INPENR LOWER 
/1PRON L^ITCH 
^IPRON L^TCH STAPLE 



78 

the carriage. The brakes should be used only when necessary as the 
bral-e shoes bear directly on the rubber tires. 

The band brake model like the tire brake has the brake lever 
on the left side of the chest and is of the contracting band brake 
type. Pulling up on the brake lever causes the brake bands to grip 
the drums bolted to the wheels. A segment rack riveted to the 
sides of the chest allows the lever to be held at any required tension. 
A brake shaft sleeve connects the brake lever to the brake shaft, 
both turn in bronze bushings held by thebrake shaft bearings, right 
and left. The brake shaft bearing right is riveted to the right side 
of the chest, while the brake shaft bearing left is held in the brake 
shaft bearing bracket which is riveted to the left side of the chest. 
The adjusting bolts are pinned to one end of the brake shaft levers, 
the other end screws into the brake band ends lower. The upper 
ends of the brake bands are slotted and have two bronze band bear- 
ings, so designed that they all fit on the brake shaft with the brake 
shaft lever in the slot and between the inner and outer bearings. 
The outer band bearings screws on the end of the shaft and is pinned 
there with a split pin. A band clip riveted to the side of the chest 
holds the band in position. Adjustment of the brake is made by 
removing the pin from the adjusting bolt and screwing it in or out 
of the brake band end lower to either tighten or loosen the brake 
band. The brake lining is renewable. 

The top of the chest has provision made for carrying a picket rope 
and spare connecting pole on the front part, an ax on the left side, 
and at the back are straps for a paulin that also serves as a seat 
cushion. The left side carries the pick mattock and hatchet, the 
right a long handled shovel, cartridge hook, and pole socket key. On 
the back are riveted a bucket holder on the right side, a lantern 
bracket in the middle, and a foot rest on the left. Between the 
intermediate plates in front, an oil can is carried on the right side, a 
fuze box on the left, and also a spanner wrench. Handrails are 
riveted on each side of the box. In every battery one caisson is 
provided with a hand reel containing one mile of wire like that for 
the caisson model of 1917. 

A name plate is attached to each caisson chest rear plate above 
the lantern. In all reports and correspondence the caisson should be 
designated by the name, number, and model given on this name plate. 
In requests for spare parts for repairs, etc., the parts should be asked 
for by the names given in the table, giving nomenclature of parts in 
this hand book, and the symbol of the unserviceable piece copied 
exactly as stamped thereon. 



79 



THE 4.7-INCH GUN CAISSON, MODEL OF 1917. 

(Plate XXI.) 
WEIGHTS, DIMENSIONS, ETC. 

Weight of caisson, empty, without implements or ammuni- 
tion pounds- . 2, 05S 

Weight of implements carried, including spare connecting 

pole .pounds. . 180 

Weight of ammunition carried. . . do. . . .. 2, 067 

Weight of caisson, completely equipped and loaded do 4, 300 

Rounds of ammunition carried 28 

Diameter of wheels .inches . . 60 

Width of track ............do.... 60 

Free height under caisson .do. . . . 18 

NOMENCLATURE OF PARTS. 



Num- 
ber on 



Name of part. 



Location, etc. 



Property 
classifica- 
tion. 



Class. 



Sec- 
tion. 



Ammunition chest connect- 
ing pieces. 
Apron. 



Apron extension 

Apron hinge (male) 

Apron hinge (female) 

Apron hinge (male) filler. . . 

Apron hinge (female) filler. . 

Apron latch (male) with 
pins. 

Apron latch (female) 

Apron hinge (female) , 

Ax pocket 

Ax stop 

Ax stop and fastener , 

Axle , 

Axle bracket 

Axle bracket bushing 

Band brakes, complete, in- 
cluding — 
Brake band 



Connect front and middlo dia- 
phragms. 

Hinged to top of chest door 
(lower). 

Riveted to apron 

do 

Riveted to chest door (lower) . . 



Pinned to apron lunge riveted 

to chest bottom. 
Pinned to apron latch male. . . 

Riveted to chest bottom 

Riveted to top of chest 

do 

do.... 



Bolted to axle 

Forced into axle brackets. 



Brake band lining 

Brake drums 

Brake hanger and 2 pins 

Brake hanger bracket 
(with 2 huts, 2 lock 
washers, and 2 steel 
plugs). 

Band clip 

Band guide 

Brake lever 



Pinned to brake hanger and 
brake rod lever. 

Riveted to brake bands 

Bolted to wheels 

On brake hanger brackets 

Bolted to axle brackets 



Brake lever bearing 

Brake lever catch 

Brake lever hook 

Brake lever pin 

Brake lever pin washer . 



Pinned to axle brackets. . J 

Riveted to brake band '. . ] 

Riveted to end of brake lever | 

bearing. 
Bolted to brake lever pin . . j 

\ Riveted to brake lever. ... ' 



Tinned to bumper (right) . 
On brake lever pin 



> rv 



80 



Nomenclature of parts — Continued. 



Num- 
ber on 
caisson. 



Name of part. 



Location, etc. 



Class. 



Band brakes, complete, in- 
cluding — Continued. 

Brake lever rod. 

Brake lever rod end . . . 

Brake lever sleeve 

Brake lever sleeve bear- 
ing. 
Brake lever stop rivet . 

Brake rod 

Brake rod end 



Brake rod lever. 
Brake shaft 



Brake shaft bearing. 



Brake shaft lever 

Segment rack support 

(upper). 
Segment rack support 

(lower). 
Segment rack 



Belleville springs 

Bumper (right) 

Bumper (left) 

Caisson prop, complete, in- 
cluding — 

Prop tube 

Prop foot 

Prop eye 

Caisson prop connection. . . 

Cartridge hook support 

Cartridge hook bracket 

Carrying spring 

Chest angle 



Chest body (lower plate) . 
Chest body (upper plate) . 

Chest door (upper) 

Chest door (lower) 

Chest guide 



Connecting pole, complete, 
including — 

Body... 

Key bearing 

Lunette 

Lunette bearing 

Lunette pins, 1 front, 1 

rear. 
Caisson prop connection 

Prop eye bolt 

Prop hook bolt : 

Prop eye , 

Prop chain. 

Prop hook 

Wheel guard 



Pinned to brake lever 

Screwed to brake lever rod 

In brake lever sleeve bearing. . 

Riveted to right side and bot- 
tom of chest. 

Riveted to segment rack 

Pinned to brake rod lever 

Screwed to end of brake rod 
and pinned to brake shaft 
lever. 

Pinned to end of brake hanger 

In brake and shaft bearing and 
brake lever sleeve. 

Riveted to left side and bot- 
tom of chest. 

On brake shaft 

Riveted to right side of chest. . . 



.do 



Riveted to segment rack sup- 
ports. 

On spring bolts 

Riveted to right side of chest. . 
Riveted to left side of chest. 



•Under connecting pole 

Riveted to connecting pole — 
Riveted to left side of chest . . . 
do 

On spring bolts 

Riveted around inside rear of 
chest. 



Hinged on front of chest 

do 

Bolted to spring support 
bracket. 



Keyed to connecting pole 
socket. 



81 



Name cf part. 



Connecting polo key 

Connecting pole socket 

Diaphragm brace 

Door angle (for upper c.iest). 
Door angle (for lower chest). 
Door end stiffener (right) . '. . 

Door end stiffener (left) 

Door handle bar 

Door handle base 

Door hinge (female) and 

rivets. 

Door hinge (male) 

Door prop 

Door prop bracket 

Door prop guide, 1 right, 1 

left. 

Door prop pin 

Door prop rivets 

Door stiffener, 2 right(upper 

chest). 
Door stiffener, 2 left (upper 

chest). 
Door stiffener (lower chest). 

Double tree chain eye 

Filler plate (right) 



Filler plate (left). 



Location, etc. 



In connecting pole key bearing 
Riveted to intermediate plates 
Riveted to middle diaphragm 

Stiffens edge of door 

do 



Property 
classifica- 
tion. 



Class. 



Sec- 
tion. 



On apron. 



Pivoted to upper door. 
Riveted to upper door. 
Riveted to chest sides. 



Riveted to upper door. 



.do. 



Foot rest 

Foot rest support (right).... 

Foot rest support (left) 

Front diaphragm (upper)... 

Front diaphragm (lower) . . . 



Fuze box bumper 

Fuze box clip 

Hand rail shank 

Hand rail tube 

Hatchet blade bracket 

Implement fastenings, com- 
plete, including— 

Fastening base 

Fastening lever 

Fastening lever pin 

Fastening spring 

Spring catch 

Spring filler (ax) 



Spring filler (wrench).. . 

Spring filler (hatchet)... 

Intermediate plate (upper) . 
Intermediate plate (lower) . . 

49877°— 18 6 



Riveted to lower door 

Riveted to sides of chest 

Reinforce for brake lever bear- 
ing. 

Reinforce for brako shaft bear- 
ing. 

Riveted to upper door 

do 

do , 

At front of chest parallel to rear 
plate. 

At front of chest parallel to 
plate. 

Riveted on upper door 

Riveted on foot rests 

Riveted to sides of chest 

Riveted on hand rail shank . . . 

Riveted to left side of chest 



Riveted to fastening spring on 

top of chert. 
Riveted to fastening spring on 

rear plate. 
Riveted to fastening spring on 

leftside of chest. 



IV 



82 



Num- 
ber cn 

caisson- 



Name of part. 



Location, etc. 



Intermediate plate reinforce 
angle: 

Lower right 

Lower left 

Upper right 

Upper left 

Lantern bracket, complete, 
including— 
Lantern bracket (body). 
Lantern bracket (bot- 
tom). 
Lantern strap fasteners . 
Lock bar (right) 



Lock bar (left) 

Lock bar bearing. 



Lock bar handle. 



Lock lever 

Lock lever bearing. 

Lock lever pin 



Lock link, with washer and 
rivets. 

Lock link bushing , 

Lunette bracket 

Middle diaphragm (Upper) . 
Middle diaphragm (lower). . 
Name plate 



Oil can guide (right). 



Oil can guide (left) . . . 
Oil can latch and pin . 
Oil can latch bearing . 



Oil can stop 

Oil can support (right) 

Oil can support (left) 

Padlock, with chain, clevis, 
and rivet. 

Pick handle rest 

Pick pocket (needle end) . . 

Pick rest 

Pintle 

Pintle bearing, with bolts 
and nuts. 

Pintle bearing support (up- 
per). 

Pintle bearing support 
(lower). 

Pintle latch 

Pintle latch pin 

Pintle latch spring 



Riveted to rear plate. 



In lock bar bearing and bear- 
ing on connecting pole socket. 
do 

Riveted to intermediate plate 
(upper). 

On ends of lock bars in bear- 
ing on connecting pole socket. 

In lock lever bearing 

Riveted to intermediate plate 
(lower). 

In lock lever and lock lever 
bearing. 

Join lock levers and lock bars. 



Forced in lock link. . . 
Riveted to rear plate. 



Riveted to center, top of rear 

plate. 
Riveted to lower intermediate 

plate. 

do 

Pinned to oil can latch bearine. 
Riveted to intermediate plate 
(upper). 
Riveted to intermediate plates. 

Riveted to oil can guide 

....do 

Riveted to chest door (upper). 



Riveted to rear plate 

do 

Riveted bottom of chest (rear) 

In pintle bearings 

Bolted to pintle bearing sup- 
ports. 

Riveted to upper intermediate 
plate. 

Riveted to lower intermediate 
plate. 

On pintle 

Through pint'e and latch I 

On pintle latch i ( 



83 



Name of part. 



Location, etc. 



Property- 
classifica- 
tion. 



Sec- 
tion. 



Pintle spring „ 

Pintle spring guide . 



Pole bracket (risjht) . . 

Pole bracket (left) 

Pole pin and split pin , 



Reinforce (for ammunition 
chest connecting piece). 

Rear diaphragm (upper) 

Rear diaphragm (lower) 

Rear plate 

Shovel handle rest 

Shovel support 

Spanner bracket (front). 

Spanner bracket (rear) 

Spanner bracket plate 

Spring bolt 

Spring bolt head 

Spring bolt head lock. 

Spring bolt washer 

Spring support bracket 

(right). 
Soring support bracket(letf) 
Water bucket stop 



Held by pintle spring guide 

and bolt. 
Riveted to pintle support 

(lower). 

Riveted to chest top 

do 

Through connecting pole and 

socket. 
Brazed on joint on connecting 

piece. 



Wing nut ., 

Wing nut pin and washer . . 

Wrench holder , 

Wheel, 60-inch, steel tired, 
complete, including— 

Hub box 

Hub ring 

Hub liner 

Hub band 



Riveted to rear plate 

do 

....do 

....do 

....do... 

Bolted to spring support 
brackets. 

Screwed to spring bolt 

do 

On spring bolt 

Riveted to chest side 

do 

Riveted between intermediate 
plates. 

2 for apron, 1 for door 

do 



IV 



Lock washer 

Wheel hooks, 1 right, 1 
left. 

Wheel hook bushing 

Hub cap 

Hub latch, complete . . . 

Hub latch spring 

Hub latch plunder 

Wheel oil valve, com- 
plete. 

Oil valve spring 

Oil valve rivet 

Oil valve washer 

Tire(steel) 

Tire bolt, washer, nut. . 

Spoke 

Felloe segment, bent, 
with bolts and washers 



Outer flanges of hubs 

Forced into hub boxes 

Screwed on hub box between 

wheel hook bushing and hub 

cap. 

On end of axle 

On outside of hub 



Under wheel hook 

On end of hub 

Actuate hub latch plunger. 

Locks hub cap in place 

Slide in hub cap 



Bolted to tires. 
Bolted to tires. 



84 



Num- 
ber on 


Name of part. 


Location, etc. 


Property 

classifica- 
tion. 


caisson. 


Class. 


Sec- 
tion. 


32 


Wheel, 60-inch, steel tired, 

complete, including-— Con. 

Spoke shoe and rivet . . . 

Spoke shoe plate 

Carriage bolts and nuts . 

Wheel fastening, com- 
plete, including— 

Wheel fastening 

Wheel fastening 

plunger. 
Wheel fastening 

spring. 
Wheel fastening 
plug. 


Holds spoke to felloes ' 


IV 




32 
16 

2 

2 


Between spoke and felloe 

Clamp spokes between hub 
boxes and rings. 


3 


2 






2 


i 




2 


! 






1 







DESCRIPTION. 



(Plate XXI.) 



The caisson model of 1917 is a two-wheeled vehicle with armored 
ammunition chest for the transportation of ammunition for the 4.7- 
inch gun. The two greatest changes from previous models are : The 
substitution of a band brake for the the brake, and a spring support 
for the ammunition box. 

The principal parts are: The wheels, axles, spring support, ammu- 
nition chest, brakes, pintle, connecting pole socket, and connecting 
pole. 

The wheels are 60-inch steel tired with standard hubs and fasteners. 

The axle is one hollow single piece of forged steel with axle brackets 
bolted on it. On the sides of the chest are riveted the support 
brackets, that, by means of chest guides and spring bolts, secure the 
chest to the axle brackets. Vertical shock while traveling is ab- 
sorbed by the Belleville springs and support springs, while bumpers 
riveted to the chest sides prevent too great spring contraction. 

The ammunition chest is built up of flanged steel except rear 
plate apron and chest d3ors, which are of armor plate. The body of 
the chest is made of two sheets of flanged steel formed to shape and 
joined at the sides. Three vertical diaphragms with connecting 
pieces provide an even distribution of the load of ammunition. Two 
intermediate plates parallel to the bottom are riveted one over and 
the other under the connecting pole socket and pintle supports. 
The upper door when raised is held at about a 60° angle. The lower 
door is made with an armor plate apron hinged to its top edge, so that 
when it is dropped it, with the upper door and rear plate, forms an 
armor plate protection. 




FI_/3TEi:ZXI 



LUNETTE BRACKET 
SMOVEL SUPPORT 
— L/1MTERM BRACKET 

PlfNTLE BEARING 
SUPPORT(UPPER) 



^PIMTLEl 

\ PINTLE BE/4RIN3 
""BOLTS 



—-PICK REST 



hWTCHET BL^PE 
•"'BRACKET 

CARRYING SPRINGS 
/3XLE BRACKET 

PINTLE L/4TCH 



-PINTLE BERING 
SUPPORT (LOWER) 

BELLEVILLE SPRINGS 

BR/3KE HUNGER 
BRACKET 

^BR/3KE H/3N©ER 
-BR/3KE ROP LEVER 



36-Z-/0S 



4.7 INCH GUM CAISSON 
MOPEL OF 1917 



WHEEL SU^RP 

LUhtTTE PirSS -, 

LUNETTE BEARING' 



^segment rack brackets 

! segment r^ck-, spars. connecting pole bracket 

FOOT REST 1 y/ 



iBR4KE LEVER 



CONMECTINS POLE BOPY / / 
COMNECTINS POLE SOCKET / 

COMMECTINe POLE KEY 

FUZE BOX CLIPS- 





PL/TTEIXXr 



-LUNETTE BRACKET 

-SHOVEL SUPPORT 

l L^I-fTERN BRACKET 



6RIP STR/4P 
DOOR PROP- 
POOR PROP GUIPE 
BUMPER- 
SPRING SUPPORT BRACKET" -C- 
CHEST POOR (LOWER) 

.._— B/IMP CUP 

■ -EMhP GUIPE 

BRAKE EV1NP 



BR^KE LINING 
BR/1KE SHAFT BE^RINQ 
BR/1KE ShWFT LEVER 

BR/^KE ROP 

BK^KE ROP ENP 



CARRYING SPRINGS 
AXiJEL BRACKET 



PINTLE L^JTCH 



PINTLE BEARING 
SUPPORT (LOWER) 
BELLEVILLE SPRINGS 



-BFMKE WhSER 
-BRAKE: ROP LEVER 



85 

The road brake is of the contracting band brake type and is 
operated from the right side of the chest by pulling up on the brake 
lever; this through a linkage causes the brake bands to grip the drums 
on the wheels. The brake bands are held in po3ition at the top by 
the band clips, which are pinned in sockets in the axle brackets; at 
the bottom brake hangers rigidly secure one end each of the brake 
bands, while the other ends are fastened to the brake rod levers and 
through linkage to the brake lever. 

The pintle is provided with a semiautomatic latch. It is sup- 
ported in the pintle bearing, which is made in two parts. The 
pintle bearing is bolted to the pintle beadng supports, upper and 
lower, which are riveted to the upper and lower intermediate plates. 

The connecting pole is attached to the caissDii by the connecting 
pole socket, which is riveted to the intermediate plates, upper and 
lower. The inside of the connecting pole socket is tapered to take 
the rear end of the connecting pole. It is also designed to take the 
regular limber pole. 

The connecting pole body is made of steel tubing, its rear end being 
finished to fit the connecting pole socket and is provided with a key 
bearing^ its front end is fitted with a lunette bearing, in which a 
lunette is secured by two pins. A forged or cast steel collar, called 
the wheel guard, is fitted and riveted to the body of the pole. 

Two foot rests of commercial flange steel are riveted to the chest 
door, upper; these also serve as handles in opening and raising the 
door. A lantern bracket of commercial flange steel, and fastenings 
for holding a pick, a shovel, a lunette, and a spanner wrench are 
riveted to the rear plate. To the top are riveted fastenings for 
holding an ax and the connecting pole, strap fastenings for the 
paulin and the caisson blankets. Cartridge hook and hatchet 
fastenings are riveted to the left side of the chest. An oil can, hold- 
ing 2 gallons, is located between the diaphragms in the front of the 
chest on the right hand side, and the space on the left is used for the 
bucket holder. g In every four caissons three carry lubricating oil 
and one hydroline. One caisson in every battery is provided with 
a reel for caisson model of 1017. > It is riveted to the top of the caisson 
and contains 1 mile of field wire so arranged that the "talk" goes 
through all the wire. The hand crank on the right is directly con- 
nected to the reel, while the left crank has a two to one ratio for fast 
reeling. 

By changing the connecting pole for the pole and adding the 
doubletree and singletrees this caisson is converted into a limber. 

In the center of the rear plate near the top is riveted the name 
plate, containing serial number, model, where manufactured, date 
and inspector's initials. In all correspondence and reports the caisson 
should be designated by the name, number, and model on this plate. In 
request for spare parts for repairs, etc., the parts should be asked for 
by^ the names given in the table, giving nomenclature of parts in 
this handbook and the symbol of the unserviceable piece copied 
exactly as stamped thereon. 



86 

MOTORIZED EQUIPMENT. 

The motorized equipment for the 4. 7-inch gun battery is: 

6 ammunition trucks. 

8, 3-ton trucks. 

1 artillery supply truck. 

1 telephone and motor battery type truck. 

3, 5-passenger motor cars. 

1 reconnaissance car. 

10 motor cycles with side car. 

10, 5-ton tractors. 

The ammunition truck consists of a steel body mounted on a four- 
wheel drive of truck chassis. The body is so designed as to accommo- 
date original packing cases of any type of ammunition. This body 
will also conveniently carry five 55-gallon steel tanks for gasoline, 
oil, and water supply. In general, it is intended to use this body 
wherever an ordnance truck is required for heavy purposes. 

The 3-ton truck is idential with the ammunition truck. 

The artillery supply truck in motorized batteries takes the place 
of, and carries the equipment of, the present battery and store 
wagons of a field artillery battery. The equipment consists of spare 
parts, etc., for the 4.7-inch battery. It carries a supply of spare 
parts, cleaning and preserving material in the following chests with 
their standard furnishings, materials, etc. 



1 spring chest. 

2 supply chests. 

1 carpenter's chest. 
1 grindstone chest. 
1 test level chest. 
1 miscellaneous chest. 



1 duplex chain block chest. 

1 spare sights chest. 

1 breech mechanism chest. 

1 cleaning material and small 

stores chest. 
1 fluid chest. 



A detailed list of what is carried is in the list of total battery equip- 
ment. This vehicle is used as a companion truck to the artillery 
repair truck whenever it may be used to carry spare parts. 

The telephone and motor battery type truck consists of a four-wheel 
drive truck chassis having the rear wheels replaced by caterpillar 
tracks to increase the efficiency of the truck when negotiating bad 
ground. It has a wire reel mounted on the rear end of the truck. 
Between the reel and the driver's seat are located chests for carrying 
fire-control instruments. On these a number of men may also sit. 
This vehicle has a speed of 12 miles per hour or better. 

The reconnaissance car consists of a 1-ton rear drive type of chassis 
having mounted upon it a steel body carrying 12 men, with the 
necessary storage space for fire-control instruments and signal appa- 
ratus. The special 45-horsepower engine with which this truck is 
equipped gives it a road speed up to 50 miles an hour when fully 
loaded. The car has four seats and accommodates three passengers 
in each seat. The front seat faces forward, the second seat back to 
back with it, and the third seat faces the second, and the fourth is 
back to back with the third. Ample leg space is allowed between 



87 

the second and the third seat. Its storage compartments include a 
rifle rack capable of carrying six rifles. 

The 5-ton artillery tractor weighs about 9,000 pounds. It has 
speeds of 1^ miles per hour, 3 miles per hour, and 6 miles per hour, 
respectively. It is intended for use with the 4.7-inch gun battery 
material. Each tractor hauls one-half of a section, or other loads 
not in excess of 10,000 pounds. 

The five-passenger motor car is the standard Dodge touring car 
and is furnished by the Quartermaster Department, as are also the 
motorcycles with side car. 

Special handbooks for the motor equipped vehicles covering their 
use and care in detail may be had from the Ordnance Department, 

CYCLOMETER. 

One carriage limber in each battery is fitted with a device which 
registers the number of miles traveled. This instrument, called 
a cyclometer, is mounted on the limber axle near the left wheel, and 
is composed of a star wheel and shaft actuating a train of gears, 
which bring figures representing 0.1 mile to 9,999.9 miles before a 
glass window in the usual manner of such meters. 

A tally pin riveted to the wheel hub strikes the star wheel and 
moves it one tooth at each revolution of the wheel. 

In assembling a tally pin on the wheel hub two 0.312 (-^) inch 
rivet holes must be drilled in the flange of the hub box 1.3 inches 
apart and C.55 inch from the end of the hub. The dowel pinhole 
in the axle locating the cyclometer bracket is 21.437 (21^) inches 
from the center line of the limber, 2.437 (2^) inches from the shoul- 
der of the axle, and at an angle of 16° to the rear of a vertical plane 
through the center line of the axle. 

Nomenclature of cyclometer parts: 

1 bracket. 



1 bracket strap. 

2 bracket strap bolts. 

1 bracket bolt with nut 

and split pin. 
1 cover. 
4 cover bolts with nuts and 

split pins. 



1 stop. 

1 spring. 

1 tally shaft. 

1 tally pin. 

1 washer (felt). 

1 counter. 

1 case (for counter). 

4 case screws. 



PADLOCKS AND BOLT SNAPS. 

The padlocks furnished for each separate vehicle, as carriage, 
artillery supply truck, reconnaissance car, etc., excepting the 
limbers, caissons, and ammunition trucks, will have keys inter- 
changeable for all locks of that particular vehicle but differing from 
all others. 

Limbers, caissons, and ammunition trucks are furnished with a 
lock, marked u AMMUNITION," which has only one key, these 
being universally interchangeable. 

Bolt snaps for temporarily securing doors, etc., occur where no 
shot bolts are provided. 



88 

SIGHTS AND QUADRANTS. 

The instruments provided for sighlirg and laying the piece in- 
clude a line sight, a rear sight, a front sight, a panoramic sight, and a. s 
range quadrant. 

LINE CIGHT. 

Tho line sight consists of a conical point as a front eight and a V 
notch as a rear sight; the former is screwed into the locking hcop and 
the latter is attachedto the breech end of the jacket; together they 
determine a line of sight parallel to the axis of the bore, useful in 
giving general direction to the gun. 

FRONT AND REAR SIGHTS. 

The front and rear sights are for general use in direct aiming. 
They consist of a front sight carrying cress wires and a rear sight of 
the peep variety. The length of the line of sight is 3G.75 inches; its 
height from the ground with gun at 0° elevation is 53.5 inches. The 
sights are supported from the cradle; the peep of the rear sight is in 
such a pesition as to come opposite the eye of the gunner seated upon 
the left trail seat. 

THE FRONT SIGHT. 

The front sight complete consists cf the front sight proper, the 
front sight holder, the front sight bracket sleeve, the front sight 
bracket wi-h skiing catch riveted on, and two split pins; that is, it 
includes all parts ercept the front sirfit bracket support. 

The support^ or the front sight bracket is riveted to the cradle in 
front of the shield. The lower end of the bracket fits into a socket 
in the bracket support. In sighting position the bracket projects 
from the cradle to the left, but for tiavelingit is prranged so that it 
may be swung toward the cradle to prevent its being injured. It is 
held in either pesition by the engagement of the spring catch in 
notches in the suppcrt socket. 

The front sight proper consists cf a pair of cross wires mounted in 
a ring. This ri T, gis secured, with cress wires at an rngle cf 45° to the 
horizontal, in the circular hole through the front sight holder. The 
sight holder has the shape of an eyebolt; its shank screws into the 
top of the front drht bracket sleeve, which screws ever the upper end 
of "the sight brccket. When adjusted, rotation of the sight holder 
in sleeve or of sleeve on bracket is prevented by split pins. 

THE REAR SIGHT. 

(Plate xxn.) 

The rear sight includes all parts, except the rear sight bracket eup> 
port ar.d the panoramic sight. The rear sight bracket support is 
riveted to the cradle and has a socket into which the lower end of the 
bracket is secured by a nut, lock rut, and split pin. The upper end 
of the sight bracket is provided with circular guides cut with the line 
of eight, gun at 0° elevation, as an axis, and upon these guides a 



m*k tw~it 





ffi^^gr % D®6) 



mm 



& 

u 

in 

Id 

§ 



h £ 

u y 



10 to H u v v in 



- 1 - id jy 

,< *? 

id in t 

n ® 5 
i 

j 

LI 
> 
kJ 

J 



I 

Q 

CO 




vlr 



89 

socket for the shank or stem of the sight is mounted. In a support 
forming part of the shank socket is a levelirg screw with threads 
engaging the segment of a worm wheel cut upon the bracket guides. 
A spiiit level is mounted upon the shank socket. This arrangement 
enables correction to be made for diferer.ee cf level cf wheels, since 
turning the levelirg screw revolves the shank sceket and with it the 
sight shank about an axis parallel to the aris of the bcre. A shank- 
socket cover is provided to strengthen the shank socket. The latest 
type of shank socket is made cf bronze and the levelirg screw support 
is made integral with it. The cover has two lugs on its inner surface 
which support sprirgs and shoes. Those shcos are rre^sed bv 1he 
springs against the shark and force it against the walls of the shank 
socket, thus taking up lost motion. 

The sight shank consists cf a steel arc whose center is the front 
sight; it slides in guides in the shank socket and is moved up and 
down in elevation by a scroll gear seated in a bess upon the shank 
socket and engaging in a r?ok cut upon the right face of the sight 
shank. A German silver sight it rge strip fits in a dcvetril scat cut 
in the rear face of the sight ehank. Ihe index fcr the scale bcirg placed 
upon the upper rear corner of the shank socket. The strip has a 
double range scale graduated in meters for the maximum range of 
the gun; the smallest division is 50 meters, but smaller subdivisions 
may readily be made with the eye. T v graduations en one scale 
are for the 45-pound shell and these on il e other for the 60-pound 
shell and shrapnel. The scroll gear is held in meeh with the rack 
on the shank by the scroll gear spring. Large movements of the 
shank may be made by pullirg the scroll gear handle out far enough 
to disengage the scroll gear from the rack and then sliding the sirht 
shank through the shank socket by hand. 

To the left side of the shank is riveted the elevation level holder, 
and in this holder is mounted a spirit level with axis parallel to the 
line joining the peep and front sights. _ This level enables ouadrant 
elevations to be given by_ setting the sight at the desired range and 
moving the gun in elevation until the level bubble is brought to the 
center. It would give the correct elevation for the range, provided 
the target and gun were en the same level. 

The shank is fashioned into a deflection guide and mounting for 
the peep sight and is prolonged upward to form a support for the 
panoramic sight. The peep sight guide is located in a transverse 
opening in the shank and is perpendicular to the shank and to the 
line of sight. The peep sight is clipped to this guide and is traversed 
along it by the peep sight screw. The latter passes through a tapped 
hole in the peep sight and is supported at each end in bearings in the 
shank. The screw is turned by a knurled head at its left end. 

The deflection scale is attached to the rear face of the peep sight 
guide and the index for the scale is on the peep sight. The gradua- 
tions are in mils. There are 45 mils upon each side of the zero, and 
the scale is marked from left to right as follows: 

40 30 20 10 90 80 70 6,360 
the actual mils being — 

40 30 20 10 6,390 6,380 6,370 6,SC0 



90 

thus, making. deflection readings, on this Bight uniform with tkose of 
the panoramic sight and the battery commander's telescope. The 
scale allows for longitudinal adjustment. 

The seat for the panoramic sight is a vertical T slot into which 
the guide lug of the panoramic sight fits. The panoramic sight is 
held in place and all wear of the parts is taken up by a clamp screw, 
ratchet, and detent. 

In firing, the sight is left in its seat. 

PANORAMIC SIGHT, MODEL OF 1917. 

(Plate XXIII.) 

The panoramic sight is a vertical telescope so fitted with an 
optical system of reflecting prisms and lenses that the gunner with 
his eye at the fixed rubber eyepiece (RE) can bring into the field 
of view an object situated at any point in a plane perpendicular to 
the axis of the telescope. 

OPTICAL SYSTEM. 

The rays coming from the object are reflected downward from the 
rotating head prism (RHP) into the rotating prism (RP). The 
rotating prism (RP) rectifies the ravs; after their passage through 
the achromatic objective lens (OL), the lower reflecting prism (LRP) 
reflects them in such a way that there is presented to the eye lens 
(EL) a reflected image, which the eyepiece magnifies. ^ A charac- 
teristic of the rotating prism is that upon rotation about its longitu- 
dinal axis the image of the object seen through it turns with twice 
the angular velocity of the rotating prism. The rotating head prism 
and rotating prism are so mounted as to rotate about this axis, the 
rotating prism following the rotating head prism with one-half of 
the angular velocity of the latter, the ima?e always remains as it 
would appear to one observing it directly with an ordinary telescope. 
The image formed by the achromatic objective lens (OL) would then 
be reversed and inverted. The rays are cross reflected to the oppo- 
site sides of the axis by the inclined faces of the lower reflecting 
prism, thus correcting the reversal. 

The combined action of the rotating head prism (RHP), the rotat- 
ing prism (RP), and lower reflecting prism (LRP), and the nature 
of action varying with different positions of the prisms provide for 
the correction of the inversion of the image. The rotating head 
prism (RHP) and lower reflecting prism (LRP), as shown in position 
on Plate XXIII, act as parallel reflectors and they without the lens 
system would present an erect image. The rotating prism (RP), 
however, inverts the rays and corrects the inversion produced by 
the achromatic objective lens (OL). It will be noted that the effect 
would be the same whether the rotating prism (RP) occupies the 
same position shown on the plate or be revolved 180° from that 
position. 

The rotating head prism (RHP) must be turned through 360° to 
get a position of 180° for the rotating prism (RP). If the rotating 



91 

head^pfism (RHP) is rotated through 180°, the rotating prism- (RP), 
and lower reflecting prism (LRP) would form reflectors set at right 
angles, and would give, without the lens system, an inverted image, 
and in conjunction with the lens system an erect image. The rotat- 
ing prism (RP) in this case will occupy a, position of 90° from that 
shown on the plate, in which position it causes no inversion but 
counteracts the inversion produced by the lower reflecting prism 
(LRP). 
The instrument has a magnifying power of 4, and a field view of 10° . 

THE PRINCIPAL PARTS. 

The principal parts of the panoramic sight are the roating head 
mechanism, the elevating device, the azimuth mechanism, the 
rotating prism mechanism, the counting device, the shank, and the 
elbow. 

ROTATING HEAD MECHANISM. 

The rotating head mechanism consists principally of the rotating 
head (RH), rotating head prism (RHP), rotating head prism holder 
(Y), prism holder cover (C2), elevation index support (G2), prism 
shield (SI), and rotating head cover (Ci;. 

The rotating head (RH) forms a housing for its movable parts, and 
provides seats for the elevation worm ball socket and cap^ (2B and 
IB), and rotating head prism holder (Y). The front opening of the 
rotating head is closed by the prism shield (Si) which forms a dust 
guard. The bottom threaded seat of the rotating head screws upon 
the upper end of the azimuth circle (J), and is locked in place by 
four rotating head retaining screws (1A). Upon the rear face of the 
rotating head (RH) is engraved a scale (G3) which is used for measur- 
ing the elevation of the rotating head prism holder ( Y) which retains 
the rotating head prism (RHP), and has an index mark upon the 
projection coinciding with the graduations of the elevation mi- 
crometer (Rl), thus measuring the angle of site. 

The rotating head prism (RHP) is mounted within the rotating 
head prism holder (Y) between the prism support front (S), prism 
support bottom (T), and prism support back (X), and is secured in 
position by the rotating head prism spring (XI) which bears upon the 
prism support back (X). The rotating head prism (RHP) is pro- 
tected on the right side by the prism holder cover (C2) and on the 
left side by the elevation index support (G2). The movement of 
the rotating head prism holder (Y) upon which the elevation seg- 
ment (WS) is cut is accomplished by the elevation worm (El) and 
the length of travel is controlled by seven brass stop rings (R2)„ 
Each ring has a small^ tongue, the edge of which engages at each 
revolution of the elevation worm (El) with the tongue on the adjacent 
ring. Each ring i3 thus engaged in its turn until six revolutions have 
been made, when the tongues are all in contact, and no further move- 
ment can be made in that direction. 



92 

The prism shield (Si) is held within the rotating head (RH) by 
the prism shield retaining piece (3A) which i3 in turn secured by 
two prism shield retaining piece screws (2A). 

The prism holder cover (C2) screws into its threaded seat located 
in the right side of the rotating head prism holder (Y) and is locked 
in position by the prism-holder cover screw (C3). 

The rotating head cover (CI) screws into its threaded seat located 
in the right side of the rotating head (RH) and is held in place by 
the rotating head cover screw (S7). The exterior of the rotating 
head cover (CI) has two small holes for teat wrench, and engravings 
" Field 10° " and "Power 4" are located on the exterior surface. 

The elevation index support (G2) screws into its threaded seat 
located in the left side of the rotating head prism holder (Y) and is 
secured in place by the elevation index support screw (G7). The 
small hole3 in the exterior surface allow the use of a teat wrench to 
enable the elevation index support (G2) to be screwed in place. 
The support retaining ring (G4) retains the elevation index support 
with rotating head prism holder^ within the rotating head and is 
locked in position by the supporting ring screw (G5). 

The elevation index (G6) is held upon the elevation index support 
(G2) by the two elevation index retaining screws (G8). The arrow 
engraved upon th3 Garman silver piece which is dovetailed in the 
elevation index (G3) coincides with the graduations of the scale 
(G3) engraved upon the rear face of the rotating head (RH). 

ELEVATION DEVICE. 

The elevation device consists principally of the elevation segment 
(WS), elevation worm (El), elevation worm ball cap and socket 
(IB and 2B), elevation worm plunger spring and plug (S3 and E2), 
elevation micrometer (Rl), seven stop rings (R2), and elevation 
index (G6). 

The elevation segment (WS) is hobbed into the rotating head 
prism holder (Y) and meshes with the elevation worm (El). 

The elevation worm (El) is mounted in the back of the rotating 
head (RH) in a ball and socket bearing (2B) which in conjunction 
with the elevation worm plunger spring (S3) and plunger (E2) pre- 
vents back lash between the elevation worm (El) and the elevation 
segment (WS). 

The elevation micrometer (Rl) is held upon the upper slotted 
end of the elevation worm (El) by the micrometer locking screw 
short (S2). The scale engraved upon the periphery is graduated 
into 100 equal divisions, numbered every 10 divisions. The upper 
exterior diameter of the elevation worm micrometer head is straight 
knurled to facilitate turning. One complete revolution of the eleva- 
tion micrometer (Rl) is equal to the distance between each gradua- 
tion upon the scale (G3) on the rear face of the rotating head. 
Each graduation represents 100 mils and the scale (G3) is so planned 
that the line of sight is horizontal when it reads 3. 







MOTE:SCREWS MARKEP^g) MAY BE 
APJUSTEP IN SERVICE. ALL OTHER 
APJUSTMEMTS TO BE MAPE BY THE 
ORPNAMCE PEPARTMENT OMLY 



1TM0PEL 0FJ9I7 



5 INCHES 



CLASS 36, PIVISI0NI5, PRflWING 23 



pl^te: xxiil 




NOTElSCREWS MARKED*© MAY BE 
APJUSTEP IM SERVICE. ALL OTHER 

@ ADJUSTMENTS TO BE MAPE BY THE 

ORDNANCE DEPARTMENT ONLY 



PAqMOR^MIC SIGHT MOPEL OF 1917 



CLASS 36, PIVISiONIS, DRAWING: 



93 

OPEN SIGHT. 

The open sight (OS) is constructed of bronze plate bent to shape 
haying an arm projecting out at each end, each arm containing a 
hole. A bronze knee is soldered to the interior of the front project- 
ing arm over the center of the hole in such a manner as to form a 
sight which is used for quick sighting. The open sight (OS) is 
secured to the rotating head cover by two open sight retaining 
screws. 

AZIMUTH MECHANISM. 

The principal parts of the azimuth mechanism are the azimuth 
circle support (I), azimuth circle (J), azimuth worm (M), bearing 
socket (WB1), bearing cap (WB), throw-out plunger (P6), spring 
(N), spring plate for azimuth circle (K), azimuth circle hood (AH), 
azimuth micrometer (PI), azimuth index (A4), and micrometer 
index (P2). 

The azimuth circle support (I) screws on the shank (G), to which 
it is pinned by two dowels (D). The rotating prism held by a 
screw in its holder is screwed into the supporting sleeve (P3) and 
then placed in the shank (G). The azimuth circle (J) rests on the 
tapering wall of the azimuth circle support (I), being held in place 
by] the spring plate for azimuth circle (EL), which alorg with the 
azimuth circle hood (AH) covers the rotating parts of the azimuth 
mechanism. The spring plate (K) furnishes the necessary friction 
between the azimuth circle (J) and the azimuth circle hood (AH). 
In the left side of the azimuth circle hood (AH) the azimuth worm 
(M) is held in a ball and socket bearing (WB) so that by mears of 
a throw out cam (0) the worm (M) may be thrown out of mesh with 
the azimuth circle (J) for quick approximate adjustment in sighting, 
but is normally held in mesh by the throw out plunger (P6) and 
spring (N). 

The German silver strip on the bottom of the azimuth circle is 
divided into 64 equal divisions and each even number is numbered. 
The numbers start at and extend in a counter clockwise direction 
for half the circumference, then start at again and continue for 
the rest of the circumference. As each complete turn of the 
azimuth worm (M) rotates the azimuth circle (J) one division, and 
the azimuth micrometer is graduated in 100 divisions, each division 
on the azimuth micrometer (PI) represents 1/6400 of the circum- 
ference or 1 mil. Therefore an angular movement of one division 
on the azimuth micrometer causes a lateral displacement of so 
near 1/1000 of the range that the difference is disregarded. Thus 
the numbers read through the azimuth circle window (AW) represent 
hundreds of mils, and the reading on the azimuth micrometer (PI) 
represents mils. On the azimuth micrometer starting from in 
each direction, every 10th division is numbered in red or black, 
those in red giving left deflection and those in black right deflection. 
The micrometer index (P2) has two arrows, one marked "L" and 
the other "R" engraved on it; the "R" filled in in black and the 



94 

"L" in red. The azimuth index arrow is filled in with black. 
As the micrometer index (P2) is fastened tightly to the azimuth 
worm (M) it must turn with it, but the azimuth micrometer (PI) 
does not, as the locking spring (LS) and deflection locking plate 
(LP) prevent it from turning when the azimuth worm (M) is turned. 
As the azimuth micrometer (PI) may be turned independently of 
the worm (M) it can be so set as to be used for a counting device. 

The shank (G) forms a body for the instrument and provides a 
seat for the azimuth circle support (I) to be doweled to and a thread 
at the lower end for the elbow (E5) to screw into. On the front of 
the shank (G) is a T lug (H) that fits into a T slot at the top of the 
rear sight, in which it is held by a screw with knurled head. 

ROTATING PRISM MECHANISM. 

The rotating prism mechanism consists principally of the 
rotating prism (HP), rotating prism holder (PC), supporting sleeve 
for rotating prism (P3), and the pinions for rotating prism and 
rotating head (P4). The azimuth circle (J) is geared by means of 
two pinions (P4) turning on the pinion shaft (PS) set in the azimuth 
circle support (I), to the rotating prism holder (PC) so that the 
angular movement of the rotating head (RH) is twice that of the 
rotating prism holder (PC). The rotating prism (RP) is retained in 
the rotating prism holder (PC) by a set screw (RS) and a block (B3) 
cemented to the rotating prism (RP) after the prism is ground out 
to fit it. 

ELBOW. 

The principal parts mounted in the lower end of the elbow are: 
The reticule (F), reticule cell (RC2), achromatic field lens (FL), 
achromatic eye lens (EL), eye lens cell (EC), and rubber eyepiece 
(RE). 

The achromatic objective lens (OL) is ^ mounted in the upper 
end of the objective lens cell (LC). This cell is secured in its 
threaded seat in the upper end of the elbow (E5) by two objective 
lens cell retaining screws (CS). 

The elbow is screwed in the lower end of the shank (G) and 
secured by the four elbow retaining screws (4ES) in such a manner 
that its projecting arm is perpendicular to the axis of the instru- 
ment. 

The lower reflecting prism (LRP) remains stationary as it is 
firmly pressed against seats machined in the elbow (E5) by a holder 
(X2) fitted to a seat at the bottom of the elbow. The tension of 
this holder is regulated by a wedge (W) to the required amount. 
Upon the right side of the elbow (E5) is an opening through which 
the light is thrown upon the reticule (F). This opening is covered 
by the window (SW) to protect the interior of the eyepiece from 
dust and dirt. The shutter (S4) is so designed to slide over the 
opening in the elbow (SW), being guided by the shutter stop screw 
and movement limited by the elongated slot. 



95 



The reticule (F) has two crosslines etched on its surface and is 
mounted in the forwarded end of the reticule cell (RC2) which is 
secured in the eye lens cell (EC) by the reticule celF retaining 
screw. The horizontal crossline of the reticule is graduated in 
mils. 

The achromatic eye lens (EL) is mounted in the eye lens cell 
(EC) and is separated from the achromatic field lens (FL) by the 
lens separator (LC3). The achromatic field lens (FL) is held within 
the eye lens cell (EC) by the field lens retaining ring (LR3), which 
in turn is locked by the field lens cell retaining ring screw. The 
eye lens cell is secured to the elbow by the eye lens cell retaining 
screw (ESI). 

All interior metallic surfaces exposed to the refracted light are 
finished with dull black baking enamel. All exposed optical 
elements, covers, and nonrotating joints are sealed with the litharge 
cement or equal. All German silver graduated surfaces are sand- 
blasted and lacquered. 

Note. — Screws marked (AS) may be adjusted in service. All 
other adjustments to be made by the Ordnance Department only. 



PANORAMIC SIGHT, MODEL OF 1917. 

(Plate XXIII.) 



No. 


Symbol. 


Namo of part. 


1 


AH 


Azimuth circle hood. 

Azimuth circle window. 

Rotating head retaining screw. 

Prism shield retaining piece screw. 

Prism shield retaining piece. 

Azimuth index. 

Elevation worm ball cap. 

Elevation worm ball socket. 

Block in rotating prism. 

Objective lens cell retaining screw. 

Rotating head cover. 

Prism holder cover. 

Prism holder cover screw. 

Dowel pin. 

Eye lens cell. 

Achromatic eye lens. 

Eye lens cell retaining screw. 

Elevation worm. 

Worm plunger spring plug. 

Elbow retaining screw. 

Elbow. 

Reticule. 

Achromatic field lens. 

Shank. 

Elevation index support. 

Scale. 

Support retaining ring. 

Support retaining ring screw. 

Elevation index. 

Elevation index support screw. 

Elevation index retaining screws. 

"T" lug. 




2 


AW 




3 


1A 




4 


2A 




5 


3A 




6 


A4 




7 


IB 




8 


2B 




9 


B3 




10 


OS 




11 


CI 




12 


C2 




13 


C3 




14 


D 




15 


EC 




16 


EL 




17 


ESI 




18 


El 




19 


E2.... 




20 


4ES 




21 


E5 




22 


F 




23 


FL 




21 


G 




25 


G2 




?r, 


G3 




27 


G4 




28 
29 


G5 

G6 




30 


G7 




31 


G8 




32 


Ih 





96 



Panoramic sight, model of 1917 — Continued. 



No. 


Symbol. 


Name of part. 


33 


5ITS 




34 


r 


Azimuth circle support. 
Azimuth circle. 


35 


j 


36 


K 


Spring plate for azimuth circle. 
German silver strip. 
Object lens cell. 


37 


L 


38 


LC 


39 


LP 


Deflection locking plate. 

Lower reflecting prism. 

Locking spring. 

Lens separator. 

Field lens cell retaining ring. 


40 


LRP 


41 


LS 


42 


LC3. 


43 


LR3 


44 


M 




45 


N 


Soring. 
Throw out cam. 


4f) 





47 


OL 


Achromatic objective lens. 


48 


OS 


Open sight. 


49 


P 


Throw out lever. 


50 


PC 


Rotating prism holder. 


51 


PS 


52 


PI 


Azimuth micrometer. 


53 


P2 




54 


P3 


Supporting slee^ e for rotating prism. 
Pinions for rotation prism and rotating head. 


55 


P4 


56 


P5 


Azimuth worm knob. 


57 


P6 


Throw out plunger. 
Reticule cell. 


58 


RC2.. 


59 


RE 


Rubber eyepiece. 
Rotating head. 
Rotating head prism. 


60 
61 


RH 

RHP 


62 


RN 




63 


RP 


Rotating prism. 

Rotating prism holder screw. 

Retaining washer. 


64 


RS 


65 


RW 


66 


Rl 


Elevation micrometer. 


67 


R2 


Stop ring. 

Prism support front. 


68 


S 


69 


SB 


Index knob washer. 


70 


sw 


Window. 


71 


SI 


Prism snield. 


72 


S2 


Micrometer locking screw, short. 


73 


S3 


Worm plunger spring. 
Shutter. 


74 


S4 


75 


85... 


Micrometer locking screw, long. 


76 


S7 


Rotating head cover screw. 


77 


T 


Prism support bottom. 


78 


TP 


Taper pin. 
Wedge. 


79 


W 


80 


WB 


Bearing cap. 


81 


WB1 


Bearing socket. 


82 


WS... 


Elevation segment. 


83 


X 


Prism support back. 
Rotating head prism spring. 
Tower reflecting prism holder. 
Rotating head prism holder. 


84 


XI 


85 


X2 


86 


Y 









97 

THE RANGE QUADRANT. 

(Plate XXIV.) 

In this carriage the elevating and traversing mechanisms are 
entirely independent of each other, and the laying of the gun may 
be accomplished for indirect aiming by assigning to one gunner the 
laying for direction and to a second that for range. The gunner on 
the left of the piece using the open or panoramic sight lays for direc- 
tion only, while the gunner on the right trail seat gives elevations 
by means of the range quadrant. 

The range quadrant consists of the quadrant bracket, rocker, body, 
scroll, gear, range disk, and range and cross levels with suitable 
leveling screws. 

A quadrant-bracket fastening riveted to the right side of the 
cradle has dovetailed guides in which the quadrant bracket fits and 
is held by a spring catch. Two bracket fulcrums screwed into arms 
on the bracket project into bearings in the ends of the rocker, assem- 
bling the latter to the bracket and at the same time permitting it a 
motion of rotation about an axis joining the centers of the bracket 
fulcrums or trunnions. As assembled, this axis of motion is parallel 
to the axis of the gun. A projection below the rear end of the rocker 
forms a seat for a leveling screw, the axis of which is in a plane per- 
pendicular to the axis of the gun. The knurled head of this screw 
projects to the right and its threads mesh in the segment of a worm 
wheel cut on the quadrant bracket. This leveling^ screw is thus 
arranged to rotate the rocker on its trunnions and, in conjunction 
with the > cross level mentioned below, enables the quadrant to be 
brought into a vertical plane parallel to the axis of the gun. This 
construction is necessary to correct for difference of level of wheels 
and to give true quadrant elevations. At the front end of the 
rocker is the seat for a fulcrum pin, which forms the center of 
motion of the quadrant body. At the rear end of the rocker a 
curved arm projects upward which has circular racks cut on its 
front and rear edges. This curved arm passes through a slot in 
the body and the centers of the racks coincide with its center of 
motion. 

The body, as stated above, is pivoted on the rocker. Its rear end 
affords a housing for the quadrant elevating gear and a seat for the 
range disk. The elevating gear consists of a scroll gear, meshing 
with the rear circular rack of the rocker. The scroll gear is actuated 
by a knurled handwheel, which projects upward and to the rear. 
Turning the handwheel rotates the body on its fulcrum pin, moving 
its rear end up or down on the curved arm of the rocker. The scroll 
gear is pressed against its rack by a spring; large changes of position 
of the quadrant body may be made by pulling the handwheel out 
to disengage the gear from the rack and then moving the body by 
hand to the desired position. 

The range disk is assembled on a steel shaft seated in the quadrant 
body ; this shaft carries a pinion which meshes with the front circular 
rack on the curved arm of the quadrant rocker. The range disk is 
49877°~^-18 7 



98 

held on the shaft between two steel friction disks. The outer fric- 
tion disk on quadrants is split radially and has a serrated edge. 
This combined with the slight spring allowed in the washer forms 
an adjustable yet secure lock for the range disk. A nut screwed on 
the shaft clamps the disks in position, and a lock screw in the end of 
the shaft prevents the nut from unscrewing. The inner friction disk 
is connected to the shaft by lugs projecting into a slotted collar. A 
spiral spring, the tension of which serves to take up any lost motion 
■in the arrangement, is connected at its outer end to the inner friction 
disk by a pin. It is wound around the hub of the body and secured 
to the hub in a slot cut to receive it. 

The face of the range disk, which is visible on the right side of the 
quadrant, is graduated in meters for ranges up to the maximum 
range of the gun. The disk for the 4.7-inch gun has two range scales, 
one for the 45-pound shell and the other one for the 60-pound shell 
and shrapnel . The caliber of gun for which the range disk is made is 
engraved on the face of the disk. 

The least division is 100 meters below 500 meters and 50 meters 
above 500 meters, and the scale is dimensioned at each 500 meters. 
Divisions smaller than 50 meters may be readily made with the eye. 
The range disk is always in gear through its shaft and pinion with 
the rack on the curved arm of the rocker, and any change in position 
of the quadrant body with reference to the rocker arm is registered 
by the disk. 

The elevation level holder is seated on the forward part of the 
body, with its front end pivoted on the fulcrum pin of the latter. 
Its rear end is finished with a segment of a worm wheel, cut with the 
fulcrum axis as a center, which meshes with a vertical micrometer 
screw seated in the body. The amount of the relative motion of the 
level holder and body is measured by a level scale, consisting of an 
ordinary circular scale dovetailed in the body with an index on the 
elevation level holder supplemented by a level micrometer disk on 
the upper end of the micrometer screw. The level scale is graduated 
in sixty-fourths of the circumference, and one complete turn of the 
screw moves the level holder through one of these divisions. The 
level micrometer disk on the head of the micrometer screw has 100 
divisions, so that one of these divisions corresponds to one mil. The 
divisions of the circular scale are marked 2, 3, 4, and 5, and in con- 
nection with the level micrometer disk are read 200, 300, etc., plus 
the indication of the latter. The 3 or 300 mark corresponds to the 
mean or zero position of the elevation level holder. The level 
holder 13 fitted with two spirit levels of a sensitiveness of 0.1 inch, 
which equals five minutes of arc. The longitudinal or range level 
is located so that its axis is parallel to the axis of the gun when the 
level scale is set at 3 and range disk at zero. 

The axis of the transverse or cross level is perpendicular to that 
of the range level and also to the plane of motion of the quadrant 
body. The cross level in connection with the leveling screw enables 
the quadrant rocker and body to be kept vertical. The range level 
in connection with the ele\ation level holder and its level screw is 
used as a clinometer to correct the range disk readings for angle ci 



99 

site; in connection with the quadrant body it is used as the quadrant 
level. For purposes of reference, these levels are designated as the 
cross level and the range level, and their respective screws as the 
leveling screw and micrometer screw; the scale pertaining to the 
latter screw is called the level micrometer disk. The range level is 
also referred to at times as the quadrant or angle of site level. 

The range quadrant remains in position on the cradle during firing. 
When not in use it is removed from the cradle and carried in the 
range quadrant case on the rear face of the main shield. To remove 
range quadrant from the cradle, release the spring catch and slip 
the quadrant from the support. 

USE OF SIGHTS AND QUADRANTS. 

By construction and method of mounting with longitudinal and 
cross levels on the rear sight, the panoramic sight forms a horizontal 
augle measuring instrument. These angles are read directly from the 
deflection scale of the sight in units, mils, equivalent to -^Ve °$ a 
complete circle, or 360°. 

USE OF THE PANORAMIC SIGHTS, MODEL OF 1917. 

For direct aiming. — Set the rear sight at the required elevations and 
correct for difference of level of wheels; set off the desired deflection 
on the azimuth circle of the panoramic sight; bring the crosslines of 
the sight upon the target by means of the elevating and traversing 
devices of the carriage. For imparting the approximate initial direc- 
tion the line sight may be used with advantage. 

In using the model of 1917 sight for direct fire care must be taken 
that the rotating head be set at 300 mils and the deflection mechanism 
atO. 

For indirect aiming. — Set the rear sight at the required elevation 
and make correction for difference of level of wheels; set the azimuth 
circle of the panoramic sight at the deflection ordered. Lay the gun 
for deflection by directing the vertical line of the panoramic sight at 
the auxiliary aiming point, the elevation of the gun being given by 
using the range quadrant. 

The angle of deflection to be set off on the azimuth circle of the 
panoramic sight is the same as the angle made by joining the target 
and the auxiliary aiming point with the sight. 

RANGE QUADRANT. 

To give quadrant elevations with the range quadrant.— Set the range 
disk for the desired range by turning the quadrant elevating hand 
wheel and correct for difference in level of wheels; correct for angle 
of site on the scale of the level holder; bring the bubble cf the range 
level to the center. by elevating or depressing the gun. The gun will 
then have the elevation (corrected for angle of site) corresponding 
to the range. ... 



100 

CARE OF SIGHTS AND QUADRANT. 

Whenever convenient, and especially when in garrison and not in 
use, the front and rear sights with the range quadrants and pano- 
ramic sights should be removed from the carriages and kept in 
some dry place, as in the barracks' storeroom or office. 

CARE OF FRONT AND REAR SIGHTS. 

For traveling, the front sight is covered by the duck cover sup- 
plied for the purpose, and by means of the spring catch at the base 
of the bracket it is turned 105° from its firing position and locked 
to the front sight bracket support. The sight shank is withdrawn 
from the shank socket, covered with the cover for rear sight shank, 
and placed in the packing provided for it in the trail of the carriage. 
A duck cover, called the cover for rear sight bracket, is provided to 
protect the surfaces of the shank socket and should be slipped over 
the socket when the shank is removed. 

All parts of the sight shanks and shank sockets should be kept 
clean, free from rust, and lightly oiled. When stored or not used 
for short periods, they should be thoroughly cleaned and well coated 
with light slushing oil. Should any part become rusted, it should be 
carefully cleaned by softening the rust 'with coal oil and rubbing 
with a soft pine stick. 

In handling all parts of the sights care must be exercised to avoid 
injuring them by dropping, striking them upon or with other parts, 
etc. The front sight bracket must not be used by the cannoneers as 
a handle to assist in mounting upon or dismounting from the carriage. 

To clean the joint bet ween the bracket and the shank socket, drive 
out the pin from the end of the leveling screw and remove the level- 
ing screw. Disassemble the bracket from the shank, clean all parts 
and oil them with sperm oil. Assemble in the reverse order. 

Oil the leveling screw from time to time through the oil hole pro- 
vided in the sight bracket. 

For instructions for the replacement of level vials see instructions 
given under the heading "Care of range quadrant." 

CARE OF THE PANORAMIC SIGHT, MODEL 1917. 

These sights are delicate instruments, and must not be subjected 
to any rough usage, jars, or strains. In tiring they remain in position 
on the carriage; in the field when not in use they are kept in the 
padded leather cases prepared for them on the rear of the main shield. 

To obtain satisfactory vision, the glasses must be perfectly clean 
and dry. The T lug on the sight and the slot forming its seat should 
be kept lightly oiled as a preventive of rust. The worm and worm 
rack should be oiled with vaseline. When dust accumulates on the 
pointers it should be removed by a fine camel's hair brush in the 
hands of an experienced person. 

To clean the rotating head window and the front face of the 
rotating head, do not remove the rotating head window from the 
window cell. 

In panoramic sights of serial numbers after 152 the exposed optical 
elements and all nonmoving joints are sealed and no attempt should be 
made to remove them. 



101 



CARE OF RANGE QUADRANT. 

The directions for the care of the range quadrant are practically 
the same as those for the care of the various sights.^ The parts 
should be kept clean, free from rust, and bearings lightly oiled. 
When stored they should be coated with light slushing oil. 

To clean the micrometer screw, remove the screw in the center of 
the micrometer dial, turn the micrometer screw until the dial is 
forced off; drive (away from gun) the taper pin holding the screw 
bushing. Pull out the screw bushing, clean, oil with a heavy oil, and 
assemble in the reverse order and adjust. 

Extra glass level vials assembled in brass tubes, to replace broken 
vials in sights and range quadrants, except for the range levers of 
quadrants, will be issued on requisition. In case the range level of 
the range quadrant requires replacement, the range quadrant will be 
turned in to an arsenal designated by the armament officer. 

Only ordinary tools, such as a hammer and a punch or a piece of 
wire, are required for the removal of pins from level caps in order to 
replace vials. All pins on level caps are driven in toward the center 
of the instrument. They should be driven out in the opposite direc- 
tion. Four radial screws in the vial tubes are used for adjusting the 
tubes in their holders. 

ADJUSTMENT OF SIGHTS AND QUADRANT. 

The sights are correctly adjusted when, at zero elevation and deflec- 
tion, the line of sight is parallel to the axis of the bore. 

The range quadrant is correctly adjusted when, with the range 
disk set at zero, level scale set at 300, and axis of gun horizontal and 
corrected for difference of level of wheels, the level bubble of the 
range level stands in the center of its vial. In adjusting sights, the 
panoramic sight should first be corrected. If the rear sight is 
adjusted first, it will require readjustment if the subsequent adjust- 
ment of the panoramic sight causes a change in position of the rear 
sight range strip. 

ADJUSTMENT FOR BACKLASH OF PANORAMIC SIGHT, MODEL OF 1917. 

Provision for automatically taking up the backlash that may occur 
between the azimuth worm and azimuth circle and also between the 
elevation worm and its segment is made in their design. So if any 
backlash should occur its adjustment should be made by the Ord- 
nance Department. 

TO ADJUST THE PANORAMIC SIGHT, MODEL OF 1917. 

Direct the panoramic sight by means of the azimuth micrometer 
and rear sight scroll gear until its line of sight is parallel to the 
axis of the bore. The method of determining when this condition of 
parallelism exists is described hereafter. Without disturbing the 
direction of this line of sight move the azimuth micrometer of 
panoramic sight and the range strip of the rear sight until the zero 



102 

marks come opposite theiv respective indices. The azimuth microm- 
eter may be moved after loosening the locking screw in the end 
of the worm. This locking screw may be loosened by the combined 
teat wrench and screw driver issued for the purpose. If the azimuth 
micrometer can not be readily removed, grasp the sight by the 
azimuth micrometer, release the worm from the worm gear of the 
azimuth circle, and gently tap the exposed end of the worm with a 
small piece of wood or soft metal. 

To locate the index opposite the zero of the scale, loosen the four 
screws that hold the movable index cover in place and move this 
cover until the index is properly located; then tighten the screws. 
Movement of the range strip of the rear sight is made possible by a 
slot in the shank in which the range strip screw can be moved when' 
the nut has been loosened. 

TO ADJUST FRONT AND REAR SIGHT. 

Set the rear sight shank at zero elevation and move the peep sight 
and the front sight until the line of sight is parallel to the axis of the 
bore. The method of determining when this condition of parallelism 
exists is given below. Now shift the deflection scale on the rear sight, 
after loosening the two screws, until its zero is opposite the index on 
the peep sight. - » .. 

Movement of the front sight is accomplished by turning the front 
sight bracket sleeve, after first removing the split pins. 

TO ADJUST THE RANGE QUADRANT. 

Elevate or depress gun until its axis is horizontal, correct for 
difference of level of wheels, set the level scale of the quadrant at 
300, then turn the quadrant handwheel until the range level bubble 
is centered. ^ Now turn the range disk.of the quadrant until its zero 
coincides with the index. The range disk is held between two fric- 
tion disks secured by a nut and lock screw and it is- only necessary , 
to unscrew these to release the disk and correct its position. To 
test the horizontality of the gun, use the testing level issued for that 
purpose. This level has two arms perpendicular to each other, and 
a level vial is inserted in each arm. As the faces of the breech and 
the muzzle are perpendicular to the axis of the bore, the horizontality 
of the axis of the bore may be determined by placing one of the arms 
of the testing level against the face of the breechor muzzle and ele- 
vating or depressing the gun until the bubble in the level of the 
other arm is in the center. Then apply the other arm to the same 
face, and the bubble in the first arm should also be in the center of its 
vial. If not, the testing level requires adjustment. 

VERIFICATION OF PARALLELISM OF LINES OF SIGHT AND AXIS OF BORE. 

The adjustment of the sights and range quadrant is of such impor- 
tance and should be verified so frequently that battery commanders 
will find it advantageous to make permanent arrangements for such 



103 



verification . The leveled supports constituting the carriage emplace- 
ment should preferably be of stone. The site of the target (fig. 1) 
should be prepared, and the exact locations of the target and hori- 
zontal reference points permanently marked. If these arrangements 



PANORAMIC 




OPEN 



4 - 6.395 FOR PANORAMIC SI^HT, MO PEL OF I904. 
F) = 8^3 FOR PANORAMIC SIGHT, MOPEL OF 19/5. 
A -- 9.0IF FOR PANORAMIC SIGHT, MOPEL OF 19/7. 



FIG. I. 



are properly made, subsequent verifications of sights and quadrants 
will become a simple matter. 

A target of dimensions given in figure 1 is placed in a vertical 
position perpendicular to the line of sight at such a height that the 
point "bore" is at the same height as the axis of the bore of the gun. 



104 

The vertically of the target is assured by a plumb line attached at A, 
coinciding with the vertical line A B. 

The carriage is placed with the wheels and trail resting upon solid 
supports of wood or stone, the surfaces of which have been carefully 
leveled so as to bring the axle axis horizontal. Now direct the gun 
so that the prolongation of the axis of the bore, as determined by the 
bore sights, pierces the target at the proper point; the lines of sight 
of the open and panoramic sights are then adjusted in direction by 
the means explained above until they pierce the targets in the points 
marked, respectively, "open" and "panoramic." 

The axis of the bore is determined and prolonged by means of bore 
sights. In the absence of such means a breech-bore sight may be 
made from an empty cartridge case from which the primer has been 
removed; a piece of^ paper should be pasted over the primer seat and 
a pinhole made in its exact center to serve as a peep sight. If the 
cartridge case does not completely fill the bore, it should be shimmed 
all around with tissue paper until it does so. For a muzzle-bore 
sight use should be made of the traces of the horizontal and vertical 
planes containing the axis of the bore, which are marked on the 
muzzle of the gun . Fine threads or hairs stretched across the muzzle 
to coincide with these lines form a good bore sight, and the ends of 
such threads may be conveniently fastened to a cloth strap buckled 
around the muzzle of the gun. 

In the field, where from lack of time or proper facilities the method 
just given can not be followed, the adjustment of the sights may be 
verified by bringing the lines of sight at zero elevation and deflection 
to bear upon some sharply denned point of a distant object. At such 
a range (for instance, 2,000 meters or more) the parallax may be 
neglected, and if the sights are correctly adjusted the lines of sight 
and the prolongation of the axis of the bore will sensibly pass through 
the selected aiming point. 

ADDITIONAL TESTS. 

After the sights and range quadrant are adjusted they should be 
subjected to the following tests to insure their accuracy at extremes 
of elevation and azimuth: 

(a) With carriage level and gun and sights at zero elevation and 
deflection, the lines of sight and axis of bore prolonged pierce the tar- 
get (fig. 1) in the proper points. 

(6) The gun is then moved to its maximum elevation; as the sight 
elevation is altered, the lines of sight should follow the vertical lines 
through the same points of the target (fig. 1). 

(c) With conditions as in (a), the gun is moved upon the carriage 
to its extreme positions in azimuth; as the sight deflections are now 
altered, the lines of sight should follow the horizontal lines through 
the same points on the target (fig. 1). 

(d) With conditions as in (a), the range quadrant disk registers 0. 
As the gun is elevated and the sight elevation changed to bring the 
line of sight to bear upon the proper point of the target (fig. 1), the 
readings of the range disk, quadrant leveled, should agree at all 
ranges with those of the elevation scale of the sight. 



105 

By construction and assemblage the sights, if correctly adjusted, 
should fulfill the above conditions with substantial accuracy. If 
error be noted, a report of the facts of the case with the cause, if 
known, should be made to the ordnance officer charged with the 
repair of the materiel for his information and action. 

SPARE SIGHTS AND QUADRANT. 

To each battery is issued one set of spare sights, consisting of one 
front sight complete, one rear sight complete, one panoramic sight, 
and one range quadrant. These parts are carried in a special chest 
on the artillery supply truck. One set of bore sights (consisting of 
one breech and one muzzle bore sight) and one level for use in ad- 
justing sights, etc., are also issued to each battery. 

ADJUSTING INSTRUMENTS. 

A complete detailed description of the method of disassembling 
and adjusting the different instruments is given in Ordnance Office 
Pamphlet No. 1795, Instructions for the Care, Preservation, Repair, 
and Adjustment of Instruments for the Fire-Control Systems for 
Coast and Field Artillery. Attention is invited to General Orders, 
No. 47, War Department, March 24, 1905, with reference to the care 
and repair of panoramic sights, battery commander's telescopes, and 
range finders. 

No disassembling of instruments except as prescribed herein will 
be permitted. The disassembling of telescopic instruments allowed 
herein must be done only in the presence of a commissioned officer. 
Disassembling as permitted in pamphlet 1795 must be done only by 
officers or employees of the Ordnance Department. 

TARGETS. 

The description and allowances of targets and accessories for 
mobile Artillery are given in Ordnance Office Pamphlet, Form No. 
1994, "Mobile Artillery Targets and Accessories. " 

GENERAL INFORMATION. 

PAINTING ARTILLERY MATERIEL. 

The paint issued for this purpose is of olive-drab color, put up in 
5-pound cans ready for use, and is applied to both wood and metal 
parts. If the paint is too thick, turpentine should be used as a 
thinner, but not to greater extent than 2 per cent by volume. 

All steel and iron nonbearing surfaces will be painted, including 
that portion of the underside of the gun between the clips. Wearing 
and bearing surfaces, teeth of gear wheels, elevating screws, piston 
rods, cylinders, counter recoil springs, and interiors of spring cylin- 
ders will not be painted. 

Articles which can be easily cleaned and repainted may be im- 
mersed in the solution. It is forbidden to immerse articles which 
can not be entirely repainted; for example, ammunition chests, the 
joints and some parts of the interior of which it would not be prac- 
ticable to repaint. 



106 

All parts to be painted should be free from dirt or grease. They 
may be washed in a liquid made by dissolving one-half pound sal 
soda in 8 quarts of warm water, tnen rinsed in clean water, and 
wiped thoroughly dry. 

Where the materiel is in fair condition and only marred in spots, 
the marred places should be primed with olive-drab paint, second 
coat, and permitted to dry. Then the whole surface should be 
sandpapered with No. 1£ sandpaper and a coat of paint applied 
and allowed to dry thoroughly before use. 

Where the materiel is in bad condition all parts should be thor- 
oughly sandpapered with No. 2\ sandpaper, be given a coat of paint, 
and be permitted to dry for at least 24 hours; then sandpaper with- 
No. 00 sandpaper, apply a finishing coat, and permit the parts to dry 
thoroughly before use. 

In general^ two coats of paint per year will be sufficient to keep 
the matenel in good condition. After repeated painting the paint 
may become so thick as to scale off in places or give an unsightly 
appearance. It may then be removed for repainting, as follows: 

Dissolve 1 pound of concentrated lye, powdered form, in 6 pints 
of hot water, and slake in enough lime to give the solution the con- 
sistency of paint. Use the solution freshly mixed and apply to the 
parts where paint is to be removed with a brush or with waste tied 
to the end of a stick. When the solution begins to dry on the surface 
use a scraper to remove the old paint, and complete the cleaning of 
the surface with cloth and water. If one application is not sufficient 
to loosen the paint, apply a second coat. Before painting wash the 
surface with sal-soda water, rinse with clean water, and th,en wipe 
thoroughly, as described above. 

OILS FOR ARTILLERY MATERIEL. 

For the service, cleaning, and preservation of this materiel the 
Ordnance Department issues hydroline oil, lubricating oil (or engine 
oil No. 1), clock oil, sperm oil 2 coal oil, neat' s-foot oil, and light slush- 
ing oil. Each of these oils is suited for the particular purpose for 
which it is issued, as stated below, and care should be taken that it 
is not used for other purposes. 

The hydroline oil is for use in the recoil cylinders of the carriages 
and for no other purpose. 

The lubricating oil (or engine oil No. 1) will be used exclusively 
in all oil holes of the materiel, and in lubricating such parts as 
wheels and axles, gun and cradle slides, pintle bearing, elevating 
and traversing mechanisms, exterior of cylinders, brake bearings, 
hinges, different surfaces of breechblocks, threads of breech recess, 
etc. 

Clock oil should be used on the spindle and all bearings of the 
battery commander's telescope, bearings of the panoramic sight, 
and fuze setters, and on the observation telescope, field-artillery 
plotter, sextant telemeter, and worms of the rear sight. In all cases 
clock oil should only be used when the instruments mentioned are 
disassembled for cleaning. When used it should be applied by 
dropping from the end of the dropper attached to the end of the cork. 



107 

The sperm oil is a lighter lubricant than the engine oil No. 1, and 
may be used on the gears of sights, fuze setters, parts of revolvers, 
etc.; engine oil No. 1 may also be used on such parts. 

Coal oil is used by the Ordnance Department for cleaning pur- 
poses. In the field it may be used for lanterns. Coil oil for general 
illuminating purposes is furnished by the Quartermaster's Depart- 
ment. 

Neat's-foot oil is used for the care and preservation of all leather 
equipment, and should be applied as follows: After leather has been 
washed in water (lukewarm preferred) with Castile soap, allow to 
dry in the shade till nearly dry. Then apply neat's-foot oil moder- ; 
ately with a sponge or rag, rubbing in well till the leather is soft and 
pliable. 

Light slushing oil is prescribed for use in the protection and preser- 
vation of all bright or unpainted surfaces of steel or iron on all parts 
of the equipment when the materiel is to remain unused for any 
appreciable length of time. Its use as a lubricant for mobile artillery 
is forbidden. Before applying the slushing oil to any surface, the 
part should be thoroughly cleaned, so as to be free from rust, water, 
coal oil, lubricant oil, etc., as their presence will cause rusting under 
the slushing oil. The slushing oil should then be applied in a thin 
Uniform coat, since this is ALL that is necessary to give good protec- 
tion. Except in very cold weather it can be applied by using a paint 
brush, as when painting; in cold weather it should be applied by 
stippling— that is, lightly tapping the surface with the end of the 
sash tool, held with bristles perpendicular to the surface to be cov- 
ered. It can be applied to the bores of gun by the slush brush issued 
for the purpose. In cold weather it should be warmed before use for 
Coating the bores of gun. It may be readily removed by the use of 
burlap or waste dipped in coal oil. 

REPAIRS FOR FIELD ARTILLERY MATERIEL ISSUED TO THE UNITED 
STATES ARMY AND THE NATIONAL GUARD. 

Instructions relative to making repairs to field batteries and fur- 
nishing ordnance stores and supplies for them will be found in the 
General Orders issued by the War Department from time to time. 

Instructions. in reference to the care, use, and repair of delicate 
instruments, such as sights, telescopes, and range finders, will be 
found in General Orders, No. 47, War Department, Washington, 
March 24, 1905, and in O. 0. pamphlet, Form No. 1795. 

INSTRUCTIONS FOR RIVETING. 

Whenever a rivet is broken, lose, or needs replacing for any reason 
the rivets should be heated to a light yellow (just below white) color. 
They may be heated in the forges furnished with the battery equip- 
ment or in a permanent blacksmith's forge. While heating, keep the 
rivets covered with coals in order to prevent scaling. Rivets one- 
fourth inch and less in diameter may be driven cold when it is im- 
practicable to heat them. Drive them hot, however, when prac- 
ticable. Drive all rivets greater than one-fourth inch in diameter 
hot in all cases. Do not overheat or burn the rivets. Remove all 
scale from rivets after heating and before driving. Drive the rivets 



108 

home with a hammer before attempting to form the head. Hold 
rivets solidly in place with a sledge, crowbar, and fulcrum, railroad 
iron or similar heavy piece of steel. Partially form the head with the 
face and peen end of a hammer. When the head is practically formed 
by this operation use a rivet set for final forming of the head. The 
rivet set is only for this final operation. Loose rivets will result if 
they are not peened down with a hammer before the rivet set is used. 
The rivets must be held solidly in place while the riveting is being 
done, otherwise lose rivets results. 

Before starting to heat the rivets the pieces to be riveted should be 
carefully fitted and bolted together. If the holes in the two pieces 
are not in perfect alignment the cause should be determined and 
rectified instead of attemping to drift the pieces into alignment. 
If necessary for perfect alignment a slight amount of reaming or filing 
will be permitted. In no case should a rivet hole be reamed larger 
than about one sixty-fourth inch in excess of the diameter of the rivet. 
On account of inaccessibility it is sometimes difficult to insert a rivet. 
In such cases it may be inserted with a twisted stiff wire or with a 
small wooden stick split at the end to hold the rivet. Arrangements 
must be made beforehand to back up or hold the rivet in place the 
instant it is located in order that it may not have cooled too much 
for proper riveting. Hot riveting is preferable to cold riveting, as the 
head is more easily formed when hot and the contraction of the rivet 
in cooling gives a tighter fit. 

SUGGESTIONS FOR CARE AND MAINTENANCE OF MATERIEL. 

Various suggestions in reference to the care of this matenel and 
hints regarding things to be done or to be avoided are scattered 
throughout the text of this handbook; some of the more important 
are here condensed for more convenient reference. Careful compli- 
ance with these suggestions will avoid delay and possible injury to 
personnel or materiel. 

The breechblock should not be opened for at least one minute 
after a misfire. 

All work upon recoil cylinders, sights, and other optical equip- 
ment should be done in the presence of a commissioned officer. 

The recoil cylinder should never be clamped in a vise, but when 
necessary to hold it from turning a spanner applied to front end of 
cylinder should be used. 

Never remove the spring rod nuts when the piece is at an elevation. 

See that proper kindof oil is used in cylinders and for lubrication . 

Strain the oil used in filling the cylinders through a fine, clean 
cloth, and be sure that the receptacles used in handling the oil are 
clean. 

Take every precaution to keep the interior of the cylinders clean 
and to prevent the entrance of foreign particles. 

All un painted surfaces should be kept clean and free from rust, but 
in no case is a polish required. 

In assembling the gland, be sure that at least six threads of the 
gland are engaged with the threads of the stuffing box. 

Lash parte with copper wire to prevent unscrewing. 



109 

Before firing, inspect to insure that cylinders are properly closed 
and that the piston rod and spring rod nuts are in place. 

If time permits, oil slides before firing. 

If the gun fails to return fully into battery, except when caused 
by expansion of oil, it is probably due (1) to dirt on slides and guides ; 

(2) to cutting of sliding surfaces on account of dirt and lack of oil; 

(3) to gland being screwed up too tight; (4) to dirt or foreign particle 
in the cylinder, and espacially in the counter recoil buffer recess; 
(5) to weakness of springs. Ninety per cent of such cases will be 
found due to (1), (2), or (3). 

To relieve the elevating and traversing mechanisms, the cradle 
should be locked when traveling. A definite rule can not be given 
as to when the traveling lock should be used. The object of the 
traveling lock is to permit the gun to be retracted from its firing posi- 
tion, thereby relieving the carriage axle and wheels of some of the 
weight and transmitting it to the carriage limber. 

In view of the fact, however, that with the gun in this position the 
weight at the spade is excessive for limbering and unlimbering, the 
discretion of the battery commander should determine when the gun 
should be pulled back. For long marches and where the drills would 
not require unlimbering, the gun should be invariably placed in the 
traveling position. 

The set of large covers now issued should be used whenever the 
gun is pulled back into the traveling position. 

After unlimbering, release elevating and traverse lock before at- 
tempting to elevate or traverse gun . 

The length of the recoil of the gun during firing should be carefully 
observed to see that the recoil mechanism is working properly. 

For satisfactory action of the recoil controlling parts it is necessary 
that the cylinder be filled with oil in the exact method previously 
given and that the parts be kept scrupulously clean. 

Close down the ends of the recoil indicator guide to avoid loss of 
the indicator. 

If the elevating screws do not house in traveling, they are incor- 
rectly assembled. 

Keep hub bolts and hub bands properly tightened. 

To tighten hub bands, screw them as tightly as possible with the 
wrench and then force them farther by striking the end of the wrench 
with a hammer. 

Tires on wheels should be reset as soon as the vjheels have lost their 
initial dish given by shrinkage. In order to determine when this dish 
is lost without waiting for the felloe and spokes to actually become 
loos?, the following method should be used: 

Place a straightedge across the wheel, resting on the felloe and 
passing near the hub flange. Measure the distance from the straight- 
edge to a spoke near the felloe and one near the hub box. If the 
difference in these two distances is less than three-sixteenths of an 
inch the tire should be reset. 

Cold set tires are much inferior to hot set tires in that the dish given 
by the setting of the tire is lost much more rapidly when cold set. 
Cold setting should therefore be resorted to only when it is impracti- 
cable to have the tires hot set. 



■110 

Do not permit brake levers to be released by a kick or a blow. 

Unnecessary use of tire brakes on rubber tired vehicles should be most 
carefully avoided, as the rubber tires wear directly against the break- 
ing surface of the brake shoes. 

Prevent possible injury to cannoneers by causing them to stand 
clear of the counter recoil spring column in assembling or dismount- 
ing. 

.In moving the gun on or off the cradle, provide ample support for 
the breech end, so that the gun clips are in prolongation of the cradle 
guides; if this is not done, the cradle guides may be ruined. 

Do not strike any metal part directly with a hammer; interpose a 
buffer of wood or copper. 

Frequently verify the adjustment of sights. 

Require special care in handling sights. 

Be sure that the range disk of the quadrant and the range strip of 
the rear sight shank is graduated for the particular type of ammuni- 
tion used by the battery. 

Do not unnecessarily expose ammunition to the sun or load it into 
a warm gun before time for firing; if this is done, erratic shooting 
may result. 

Shells should be grouped for firing according to the weights indi- 
cated on them. All special shells should be stored apart from other 
ammunition. 

Battery commanders should frequently make a detailed inspection 
of all of the vehicles in the battery to see if any parts of them are 
broken and any nuts, screws, split_ pins, etc.. missing. If any such 
defects are found, he should immediately take steps to replace broken 
or missing parts. This is of the utmost importance, and compliance 
with these instructions will do much toward prolonging the life of 
the vehicles. _ , 

It has been found that the apron hinges occasionally become 
broken, and that the apron-hinge pins are frequently lost. When- 
ever this happens the hinges or hinge pins should be immediately 
replaced, for if this is not done the apron, which is a very expensive 
piece, is apt to become cracked or broken. 

Whenever the lunettes become loosened the lunette nuts should at 
once be tightened up. 

All wheels and pintle bearings should be frequently oiled. 

All nuts are secured by split pins, which should be replaced !and 
properly opened when nuts are screwed home. 

All working and bearing surfaces of the carriage require oiling. 
Those not directly accessible for this purpose are provided with oil 
holes closed by spring covers or handy oilers. 
. Smokeless powder must not be used for blank cartridges. 

See that fuzes are set at safety for transport. 
.'Fuze safety pips should never be removed except ivhen ready to serve to 
the. piece. ■. ' . , 

Fuzes should be screwed home till .flange 'is in contact with the 
, bushing or adapter. .' . 

; Time fuzes should be protected from damp which may lengthen 
then' time of binning or .■ prevent ignition., , deterioration might 



Ill 

cause flash from detonator pellet to powder pellet, causing premature 
explosion, 

When circumstances permit, lists should be kept up for each gun, 
of the particulars of the ammunition provided for it, in the order in 
which it is intended to expend it. Particulars would include: 
Designation and mark, initial of manufacturer or arsenal, ammuni- 
tion and lot number. Reference to the list and to the rounds in hand 
then enables ammunition just fired to be identified and the informa- 
tion i3 of assistance in tracing causes of failure. 

Use the small primer-inserting press for inserting primers in car- 
tridge cases and the decapping tools provided for removing old 
primers. 

In all requisitions and correspondence the correct name of the 
part referred to (if known) should be given. If the name of the part 
is not known, submit a sketch showing the location, shape, materiel, 
etc., sufficient to establish definitely the identity of the parts in 
question. 

The use of the word "complete "in requisitions to signify a com- 
bination of parts sometimes leads to misunderstanding of the exact 
parts wanted. The tables of nomenclature of parts have been ar- 
ranged ta show the parts included under the terms "one trail, com- 
plete; one wheel, complete," etc., and should be carefully studied 
before requisitions are made out, to insure that all the parts wanted 
are included and duplications avoided. For example, if a piston 
rod is wanted the order should state whether it is to be with or with- 
out the nut. If all details are itemized, it will avoid mistakes and 
unnecessary expense. 

SUPPLIES IN GENERAL. 

The supply of ammunition to be kept on hand in a 4.7-inch gun 
battery will be a sufficient amount to fill all the ammunition chests 
of the equipment, and in addition a sufficient number of rounds to 
cover the needs for annual target practice. 

Pistol arm racks are issued for use of Field Artillery in such number 
as may be required to hold the pistols on hand in the battery. Each 
pistol arm rack holds 80 pistols. 

The allowance of electric flashlights for each battery and their 
apportionment amongst the personnel is as follows: 

5 with hoods: 

1 for the chief of the fifth section. 

4 to equip each gunner. 
16 without hoods: ■-■.., 

1 for the battery commander. 

1 for the reconnaissance officer. 

2 to equip each chief of platoon in the firing battery.' 
4: to equip each chief of gun section. 

. 4 to equip each No. 3 in the gun sections. 
4 to equip each No. 1 in the gun sections. 



112 



In addition 3 flashlights with hoods are issued to each regimental 
and battalion headquarters for use with instruments and range 
finders. 

A reloading and cleaning outfit for 4.7-inch guns for removing 
fired primers from and cleaning cartridge cases and for reloading 
blank ammunition is furnished to each battery. 

EQUIPMENT. 

The following table sets forth the total equipment of one 4.7-inch 
gun battery motorized on war footing. The right-hand column 
shows in general where each article should be carried, but the bat- 
tery commander may use hi3 discretion as to the disposition of many 
articles for which no particular fitting or receptacle is provided. 

STATEMENT OF TOTAL EQUIPMENT OF ONE 4.7-INCH GUN BATTERY 
MOTORIZED ON WAR FOOTING. 



Num- 


Article. 


Where carried. 


Property 
classification. 


ber. 


Class. 


Sec- 
tion. 


4 


WHEELED MATERIEL. 


. 




4 








1906. 
4 4 7-innh snin and fi-ineh howit- 




1 ■ 


12 


zer limbers, model of 1905. 
Caissons, model of 1917 or model 




1 

J 




10 


of 1916.1 

MOTOR EQUIPMENT. 

Tractors. 5-ton 












1 


Artillery supply truck 






1 


Telephone and motor battery 
type truck. 






1 




3 


8 








3 






10 






1 


Reel truck, model of 1918 






4 


GUN AND GUN CARRIAGE AC- 
CESSORIES. 






4- 








4 




On gun in traveling posi- 
tion. 











J 6 caissons, model of 1908, 



. _K)8, may be substituted for 6 caissons ; model of 1917 or 1916; 
6 caisson limbers, model of 1908, may be substituted for 6 caissons. A description 
of the caisson and caisson limber, model of 1908, is in handbook No. 1771, revised 
Sept. 15, 1917. 



113 



STATEMENT OF TOTAL EQUIPMENT OF ONE 4.7-INCH GUN BATTERY 
MOTORIZED ON WAR FOOTING— Continued. 



Article. 



GTJN AND GUN CARRIAGE AC- 
CESSORIES— Continued. 



"Where carried. 



Covers for front sights 

Covers for reai sight brackets . . . 

Covers for rear sight shanks 

Dust guards for 50 inch and 60 
inch-wheels. 

Elevating gear covers 

Hand fuze setters with cases 

Horizontal oilers, model of 1913 . 

Lanyards 

Leather pouches for spare parts. 

Maneuvering "bar 

Muzzle covers 

Oil can boxes 

Spanner wrenches, cylinder 

head, and stuffing box gland. 

Sponges and rammers , complet e . 

Sponge and rammer covers 

3-pound spools, No. 20 annealed, 

bare copper wire. 
Tool kits, each containing— 

1 cross peen hammer 

1 large bronze drift 

1 pliers (wire cutting), 8- 

inch. 
1 range quadrant wrench . . . 
1 right-angle screw driver. . . 
1 screw slot wrench and 
blade. 

1 small bronze drift 

1 small punch 

1 0.75-inch cold chisel, 8- 

inch. 
1 6-inch 3-square. dead 

smooth file. 
1 8-inch hand smooth file . . . 

1 10-inch screw driver 

Wrenches, wheel hub, and j 
pintle yoke. 

Wrenches, 0.375 bv 0.5 

Wrenches, 0.625 by 0.875 ! 

Wrenches, 1.125 inch and 1.5 

inch. 
Wrenches, 0.75 by 1 ' 

49877°— 18 8 



Property 

classification. 



Class. 



sec- 
tion. 



On sights 

On wheels 

On elevating gears 

In trail boxes : j 

In oil can boxes 

In trail tool box i 

....do 

On trail 

On guns 

In trail tool box 

....do ! 

On trails J 

On sponges and rammers. . 



In trail tool box. 



114 



STATEMENT OF TOTAL EQUIPMENT OF ONE 4.7-INCH GUN BATTERY 
MOTORIZED ON WAR FOOTING— Continued. 



Num- 
ber. 




SPAEE PARTS FOR GUNS AND GUN 
CARRIAGES. 

(For guns.) 

Block latch 

Block latch spring 

Extractor 

Firing pin 

Firing (pin) spring 

Firing spring sleeve 

Handy oiler (clip) (0.312) 

Handy oiler (hinge pin) ^-inch. 
Handy oiler (jacket) (0.5-inch).. 

Hinge pin catch 

Lever latch spring 

Loading tray 

Locking bolt and pin 

Locking bolt knob 

Locking bolt spring 

Plug 

Sear 

Tray latch spring 

Tray latch stop 

Trigger fork 

Trigger shaft detent 

Breech mechanism complete. . . 



(For fuze setters.) 



Range-ring screws 

Stop-pin screws 

Guide-plate screws 

Corrector-scale screws. 

Range indices 

Index plungers 

Index springs 

Oil-hole screws 

Index-bar screws 



(For carriages.) 



Apron latch (complete) 

Apron latch spring 

Apron latch (body) pin with 

split pin. 

Adjusting bolt eye 1 

Band clip i 

Band guide 1 

Bolt, 0.5 by 0.75, with lock 

washer (for band clip). 1 



Where carried. 



In leather pouch for spare 
parts. 



In spare breech mechan- 
ism chest on artillery 
supply wagon. 



1 In leather pouch for spare 
J parts. 



In leather pouches for 
spare parts. 



Property 

classification. 



Class. 



In supply ehcst. 



IV 



tion. 



For band brake model only. 



115 



STATEMENT OF TOTAL EQUIPMENT OF ONE 4.7-INCH GUN BATTERY 
MOTORIZED ON WAR FOOTING— Continued. 



Num- 


Article. 


Where carried. 


Property 
classification 


ber. 


Class. 


Sec- 
tion. 


12 

1 
1 


SPARE PARTS FOR GUNS AND GUN 

c arriages— continued. 
(For carriages.) 

Bolt swing, for cylinder cover 

with pinion nut. 1 
Brake band with lining, ends 

and guide, right. 1 
Brake band with lining, ends 

and guide, left. 1 


In supply chest 


• IV 




1 
2 


Brake lever with cap, assembled l 




1 






2 






1 


Brake segment rack J 




2 
2 


Brake lever with catch and 

spring bracket. 2 
Brake lever spring 2 




2 


Brake rod pins 2 




1 


Brake rod spring 2 


5 inches each in leather 
pounch for spare parts, i 

In supply chest 

Equally in leather pouches 
for spare parts. 




1 

4 


Brake segment rack with bolts 2 . 
Brake shoe 2 




2 


Brake shoe pins 3 




6 
6 
6 
1 

2 
4 
4 


Counter-recoil springs, outer 

Counter-recoil springs, middle . . 

Counter-recoil springs, inner 

Elevating screw cover with split 
pin. 

Extension rail latch spring 

Extension rail plunger spring. . . 
Filling and dram plug 


3 


1 
1 
1 

20 

1 
4 

4 

20 


Firing mechanism complete 

Firing shaft return spring 

Firing handle return spring 

Garlock waterproof packing 

0.375 ring. 
Gasket, filling and drain plus;. . . 
Handspikes, complete, 2 right, 

2 left. 

Handy oilers, 0.312 0&-inch) 

Handy oilers, 0.375 




8 


Handy oilers, 0.5 




2 






1 






2 


Nuts, crown, special: 




2 
4 


1.25-inch, 12 threads 

Nuts, crown, standard: 

0. 75 




38 


0.5 




52 


0.625 





J For band brake model only. 



2 For tire brake model only. 



116 



STATEMENT OF TOTAL EQUIPMENT OF ONE 4.7-INCH GUN BATTERY 
MOTORIZED ON WAR FOOTING— Continued. 




4 

4 

13 

5 

40 

4 

8 

60 

20 

10 

90 

20 

4 

2 

3 

4 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

20 

1 

1 

2 0.01 



SPARE PARTS FOR GUNS AND GUN 

carriages— continued . 
(For carriages.) 

Nuts, crown, standard— Contd. 

0.75 

0.875 

1.25 

1.5 

Nut leveling screw 

Nut traversing 

Nuts, special 0.187 (A-inch), 

26 threads (F. A. standard). 

Nuts, 0.19, 30 threads, standard 

nut plain. 
Pins, Type A: 

0.433 by 2.4 (A=1.95) (top 
fastening shield). 

0. 610 by 1.875 ( A=1.27) ' . . . . 

0.610 by 2.125 (A=1.56) 
(brake crank) 1 . 

Pin, elevating with split pin 

Pin, extension rail with split 

pm. 
Pin, top shield brake with chain. 
Pins, split: 

0.046(A) t>7 0.312 (A)...... 

0.062 (A) by 0.562 (A) 

0. 093(A) by0.5 

0. 093 (A) bv 0.75 

0. 093 (A) by 1.0 

0.125 by0.75 

0.125byl 

a 125 by 1.25 

0.125 by 1.5 

a 156 (A) by 1 

0.156 (A) by 1.5". 

a 156 (A) by 1.75 

0. 062 (A) by 0.275 

0.203(H) by 1.5 

0.203(H) by2 

0. 203 (H) by 2.25 

a 25 by 1.5 

a 25 by 1.75 

0.25by2 

0.25by2.75 

0.25by3 

0.25by3.5 

Recoil cylinder lock catch with 
lock pin and split pin. 

Recoil indicator, complete 

Rivets, steel button-head: 

0.125by0.5 



Equally in leather pouches 
for spare parts. 



On artillery supply truck.. 



} IV 



For band brake model on I v. 



Pound. 



117 



STATEMENT OF TOTAL EQUIPMENT OF ONE 4.7-INCH GUN BATTERY 
MOTORIZED ON WAR FOOTING— Continued. 




Where carried. 




Sec- 
tion. 



SPAKE PARTS FOE GUNS AND GUN 

carriages— continued. 
(For carriages.) 

Rivets, steel, button-head — Con. 

0. 187 (A) by 0.5 

0.187 (A) byl 

0.187 (A) by 1.75 

0.25 byl 

0.312fe)bvl 

0.375 by 1.25 

0.375by2.5 :.. 

0.5byl.25 

0.5 by 2. 25 

0.5by2.75 

0.625by2.25 

Rivets, steel, countersunk head: 

0.375 by 2.75 

0.5by2 

0.5 by 1.25 (Spade) 

Rivets, countersunk 90° 0. 5 by 
1.75. 

Rivets (spade point) 

Rod, bronze, 0. 125 inch diameter 

Spade edge 

Spade point 

Sponge and rammer complete . . 

Sponge and rammer cover 

Spring cover No. 1, complete. . . 
Wheel complete, rubber (61 by 
6 inches). 

Wheel fastenings, complete 

Wheelhook 

Wing nut 

Wing nut 

Wing nut pin 

SPARE PARTS FOR 4.7-INCH AND 
6-INCH HOWITZER LIMBER, 
MODEL OF 1905. 

Handy oilers, 0. 312 (^-inch) .... 

Hub liners 

Lock washer (wheel) 

Wheel, 51 by 4 inches (rubber 
tired). 

Wheel, fastening, complete 

Wheel, hook 

Wheel oil valve, complete 

TOOLS AND ACCESSORIES FOR 4.7- 
INCH AND 6-INCH HOWITZER 
LIMBER, MODEL OF 1905. 

Cyclometer 

Cyclometer tallv pin 

Dust guard (50-inch and 60-inch 
wheel). 

' Pound. 



Carried in supply chest. . . 



On artillery supply truck . 
•Carried in supply chest . . 



In supply chest 

On artillery supply truck . 



IV 



In supply chest . 



IV 



[•On one of the 4 limbers IV 

Onwheels IV 



* Feet. 



118 



STATEMENT OF TOTAL EQUIPMENT OP ONE 4.7-INCH GUN BATTERY 
MOTORIZED ON WAR FOOTING— Continued. 



Num- 


Article. 


Where carried. 


Property 
classification. 


ber. 


Class. 


Sec- 
tion. 


3 


SPARE PARTS FOR CAISSON, 
MODEL OF 1917. 




IV 




1 






1 






1 

24 
32 


Bolt, standard, 0.625 by 2.5 (pin- 
tle bearing"). 
Bushing, with pins (axle bracket) 




2 






6 






2 






2 






2 






2 






2 






1 






2 
o 


Brake lever rod, complete 




4 






2 






2 

g 


Chain No. 16, complete (Cr., Ca., 
Cr. L.) 




6 


Chest guide, with 0.75 crown 

nut and split pin. 
Connecting pole key with split 

pin. 


3 


4 
1 






3 
3 

2 


Hub liner (Cr., Cr. L., Ca.) 

Lock washers (wheel) (Ca., Cr. 

L.,Ca.). 




g 


Nuts, standard plain: 

0.5 






12 
4 

2 

86 
86 

250 


0. 75 (forged steel No. 3) 

Nuts, crown 0. 75 (forged steel 

No. 3.) 

Padlock No. 850 with clevis and 

rivet. 
Pins, split: 

0. 125 bv 0. 75 (Cr., Ca.) 

0.156(&)byl (Cr., Cr. L., 

Ca.). 
0.156(-&) by 1.25 








8 
14 


0.25byl.75(Cr.,Ca.) 

0. 25 by 1.875 




30 
2 
10 


0.203byl.25(Cr., Ca.) 

0.203byl.5(Cr.,Ca.) 

0.25by3.5(Cr., Ca.) 





Note.— Cr.=Carriage, Ca.=Caisson, Cr. L.=sCarriage limber. 



119 



STATEMENT OP TOTAL EQUIPMENT OP ONE 4.7-INCH GUN BATTERY 
MOTORIZED ON WAR FOOTING— Continued. 




Where carried. 




Sec- 
tion. 



SPARE PARTS FOR CAISSON, 
MODEL OF 1917— COntd. 

Pins, steel: 

Pin (lunette) 



Pin (lock lever) 

Pins, type A: 

0.368 by 1.76 (A= 1.26) 

0.610 by 1.875 (A= 281) (1A). 
0.734 by 2.5 (A= 1.656) (lfi). 
0.610 by 2.375 (A=1.531)(l||) 
0.610by 2.25 ( A= 1.406) (l|-f ) . 
Pins, types C. 

0.368 by 1.25 (A= 0.625) with 

split pin. 
0.368 by 1.375 (A= 0.687) (&) 
with split pin. 
Pins, type D : 

0.610 by 3.125 (A= 1.875; 

B=0.625). 
0.866 by 3.125 (A=2; B= 
. 0.562) (^). 

Pins, pintle latch 

Pintle bearing complete 

Pintle latch 

Pintle latch spring 

Pintle spring with bolt and nut. 
Pole complete (connecting) (Cr. 
L., Ca,). 

Pole pin 

Rivets (door hinge) 

Rivet (copper) for brake lining 

0.25 by 0.875. 
Screws, steel, 0.75 by 7.125 (fillis- 
ter head) thread 1.125 long 
(axle bracket). 

Segment rack 

Spring bolt 

Spring bolt head 

Spring bolt head lock 

Washers, spring bolt 

Wheel, 61 by 5 inches (steel tire) . 
Wheel fastening (complete) (Cr 
Cr. L., Ca.). 

Wing nut pin washer 

Wing nut (Cr., Ca.) 

Wing nut pin (apron) 

Wing nut pin (door) 



In supply chest. 



IV 



i Pound. 

Note.— Cr.= Carriage, Cr. L.= Carriage limber, Ca.=Caisson. 
Spare parts for different models of caissons in each battery will be in the proportion 
of 1908, 1916, and 1917 models in that individual battery. 



120 



STATEMENT OF TOTAL EQUIPMENT OF ONE 4.7-INCH GUN BATTERY 
MOTORIZED ON WAR FOOTING— Continued. 



Num- 
ber. 



Article. 



Property 
classification. 



"Where carried. 



Class. 



Sec- 
tion. 



TOOLS AND ACCESSORIES FOR 
CAISSON, MODEL OF 1917. 

Ax 

Cartridge hooks 

Dust guards (for 50 and 60 inch 
wheel). 

Fuze box (Mark II fuze) 

Fuze box (Mark V fuze) 

Hatchet 

Lantern 

Lantern bracket pad 

Oil can (approx. 2 gal.) 

Paulin 

Pickax 

Picket rope 

Spanner for 60-inch wheel 

Shovel (short handle) 

Shovel (long handle) 



On top of chest... 
Left side of chest. 
On wheels 



>On foot rests 

On left side of chest 

On rear plate 

In lantern bracket 

Between intermediate 
plates. 

On top of chest 

On rear plate 

On top of caisson 

On rear plate 

►....do 



Straps. 



Cartridge hook . . 
Shovel handle . . . 

Pick handle 

Spanner 

Grip 

Paulin 

Limber blanket 

(long) 

Limber blanket 

(short) 

Fuze box (short) 
Fuze box (long) . 
do 



Length 



12 

15.5 

13.5 

13.5 

22.75 

42 



20 
12.5 



No. of 

holes 



Lantern, strap 

Picket rope (short), strap. 
Picket rope (long), strap. 
Wrench, 0.625 and 0.75. 



Water bucket, canvas . 

SPARE TOOLS AND ACCESSORIES. 



Cartridge hook. 

Paulin 

Picket rope — 




IV 



IV 



On artillery supply truck. 



IV 



121 



STATEMENT OF TOTAL EQUIPMENT OF ONE 4.7-INCH GUN BATTERY 
MOTORIZED ON WAR FOOTING— Continued. 



Article. 



TOOLS AND ACCESSORIES FOR 4.7- 
INCH GUN CAISSON, MODEL OF 
1908 AND 1916. 



Ax 

Cartridge hook 

Dust guard for 50 and 60 inch 
wheels. 

Hatchet 

Lantern 

Lantern bracket pad 

Oilcan 



Paulin, 12 by 12 inches . . . 

Picket rope. 

Pick mattock 

Shovel, longhandled 

Watering bucket, canvas . 

Straps 

Lantern strap 

Fuze box 

....do 



SPARE PARTS FOR CAISSONS, MOD- 
ELS OF 1908 AND 1916. 



Apron hinges, with pin 

Apron latch, complete 

Apron latch base with washer, 

split pin. 

Apron latch springs 

Brake levers with catches i 

Brake shoes l 

Brake shoe pins i 

Adjusting bolts 2 

Brake band complete 2 

Brake band linings 2 

Brake drums 2 

Brake levers complete 2 

Brake lever catches 2 

Brake lever hook 2 , 

Brake shaft bearings, left - 

Brake shaft bearings, right 2 

Brake shaft levers 2 

Caisson prop with chain and 

hook. 
Caisson prop chain (A=31.87 r >) 

and prop hook. 
Cartridge hook 



Property 
classification . 



Whore carried. 



On top of chest 

On right side of chest . 
On wheels 



On left side of chest 

On rear of chest 

On rear of chest in bracket . 
Between intermediate 
plates. 

On top of chest 

do 

On left side of chest 

On right side of chest 

On rear in bucket holder . . 



On lantern bracket 

On front door 

On lower intermediate 
plate. 



On artillery supply truck- 



Class. 



IV 


9 


IV 


3 


IV 


9 


IV 


3 



IV 



IV 



For 1 ire brake caissons only. 



.do IV 

1 For band brake caissons only. 



Sec- 
tion. 



122 



STATEMENTBOF TOTAL EQUIPMENT OF ONE 4.7-INCH GUN BATTERY 
MOTORIZED ON WAR FOOTING— Continued. 



Num- 
ber. 



Article. 



SPARE PARTS FOR CAISSONS, MOD- 
ELS OF 1914 AND 1916— COntd. 



Hub liners 

Lock washers 

Lunette 

Lunette pins 

Padlocks, chains, clevises, and 

bolt snans. 
Pintle with bearing complete . . . 
Pintle bearing bolts, 1 nut strip 

Pintle latch 

Pintle latch springs 

Pintle springs with bolts and 

nuts. 
Split pins: 

0.093 (A) by 0.5 

0.093 (-ft) by 0.75 

0.093 (•&) by 0.875 

0.093 (&) by 1 

0.125 by0.75 

0.125 by 1 

0.125 by 1.25 

0.156 (A) by 0.75 

0.156(A) byl 

0.156 (A) by 1.25 

0.156 (A) by 1.5 

0.203(H) by 1.25... 

0.203(H) by2 

0.25 by 1 

0.25 by 1.25 

0.25 by 1.5 

0.25 by 2.5 

0.25 by 3.5 

Wheels complete,61-inchrubber- 

tired. 
Wheel fastenings complete 



MISCELLANEOUS SPARE PARTS 
FOR TOOLS AND ACCESSORIES. 

Padlocks with chains, clevises, 
and bolt snaps. 

Ax helves 

Hatchet handles 

Pickax handles 

Shovel handles, long 

Shovel handles, short 



SIGHTS AND QUADRANTS. 



Sights, complete 

Panoramic sights 

Range quadrants 

Teat wrenches for panoramic 
sight. 



Where carried. 



On artillery supply truck 



.do. 



Property 
classification. 



Class. 



Sec- 
tion. 



IV 



In fastening on cradles 

In case on shield 

In case on right side of trail. 
In case on shield. 



IV 



IV 



123 



STATEMENT OP TOTAL EQUIPMENT OP ONE 4.7-INCH GUN BATTERY 
MOTORIZED ON WAR FOOTING— Continued. 









Property 
classification. 


Num- 


Article. 


Where carried. 




ber. 












Class. 


Sec- 
tion. 




SPARE SIGHTS AND QUADRANTS. 








1 




Iln spare sights chests on 
| artillery supply truck. 


}lV 




1 






1 




3 


1 


Teat wrench for panoramic sight 






RANGE-FINDING AND FIRE-CON- 
TROL EQUIPMENT. 








1 

1 
1 

2 

2 

2 
10 


Aiming circle,model of 1916 com- 
plete (except case). 

Aiming circle carrying case 

Aiming circle tripod carrying 
case. 

B.C. periscopes, model of 1918, 
complete (except case). 

B. C. periscope tripod carrying 
cases. 

B.C. periscope carrying cases. . . 


On reel truck, model of 1918 


V 




2 

2 
2 

5 


B. C. telescopes, model of 1915, 
complete (except case). 

B.C. telescope carrying cases 

B. C. telescope tripod carrying 
cases. 

Flashlights with hood 


1 


16 

1 
2 
2 
2 

1 

1 

1 
2 
1 
1 


Flashlights without hood 

Plotting board, model of 1918. . . 

Prismatic compass with tripod. 

Prismatic campass carrying case 

Prismatic compass tripod carry- 
ing case. 

Range finder, 1-m. base, model 
of 1916, complete (except case). 

Range finder carrying case 

Range finder tripod and adjust- 
ing bar carrying case. 

Reel (on caisson), model of 1917. . 

Semicircular protractors 

Slide rule, model of 1917 

Steel tape (30 m.) 




1 


Straightedge, 24-inch, model of 
1917. 






MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT. 








1 


Reloading and cleaning outfit, 
consisting of— 


•On artillery supply truck . . 


IV 












1 cleaning brush 














9 




1 powder measure (saluting). 
1 press for inserting primer. . 
1 bushing 





124 



STATEMENT OF TOTAL EQUIPMENT OF ONE 4.7-INCH GUN BATTERY 
MOTORIZED ON WAR FOOTING— Continued. 



Num- 
ber. 




MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT— 

continued. 

Drill cartridges with the follow- 
ing spare parts — 

16 rotating pins 

16 stop pins 

1 graduating ring with felt 
washer. 

4 locking screws 

2 point nut screws 

Pistol cleaning kit 

Arm racks for automatic pistols. 

(For targets, see O. O. Pam- 
phlet No. 1994.) 

PERSONAL EQUIPMENT. 

The equipment of the enlisted 

menof field artillery motorized 

batteries will be as follows for 

each enlisted man: 

Can, bacon, model of 1910. . . 

Can, condiment, model of 

1910. 

Canteen, model of 1910 

Canteen cover dismounted, 

model of 1910. 
Cartridges, ball, pistol, or 20 
cartridges, ball, revolver. 

' Cup, model of 1910 

Fork, model of 1910 

Haversack, model of 1910. . . 

Knife, model of 1910 

Magazines, pistol, extra. 
Meat can, model of 1910. 

Pistol or revolver 

Pistol belt without saber 

ring. 
Pistol holster, model of 1911 . 

Spoon, model of 1910 

Pouch for first-aid packet, 
model of 1910. 
First-aid packet (Medical De- 
partment) furnished by Quar- 
termaster Corps: 

Identification tag 

Shelter tent, half 

Shelter tent, pole 

Shelter tent, pegs 



Where carried. 




Not carried in field . 



Where convenient.. 
Not carried in field. 



IV i 




125 



STATEMENT OF TOTAL EQUIPMENT OF ONE 4.7-INCH GUN BATTERY 
MOTORIZED ON WAR FOOTING— Continued. 





[ 


Property 






classification. 


Num- 






ber. 


Article . 


»l licit' OfcUHUU. 


Class. 


Sec- 
tion. 




ARTICLES CARRIED ON ARTIL- 








LERY SUPPLY TRUCK. 






1 


Chest, spring 






1 


Chest, supply (containing spare 
parts for gunsj gun carriages, 


_\ .._][[.[[[ .\_\]~j iv' 


:^ 








caissons, and limbers). 




1 


Chest, supply 


■- ! IV 1 3 


20 


Bolo 


t ' A-TT ' 


20 


Scabbards, Bolo 


VI1 


n 


Brush, varnish, No. 4-0 






12 


Brush, varnish, No. 5-0 \ 






25 


Oable,high tension,Packard 
SAE ignition, feet. 






»1 


Leather, bridle, back 


■ 






il 


Leather, collar, back 








il 


Leather, Latigo, side 








il 


Leather, harness, back 








1 


Magneto, Eisemann G-4 
second edition, complete 










with impulse starter, 








clockwise rotation for 








Nash trucks; counter 




• 




clockwise rotation for 








F. W. D. truck. 






6 


Pliers, wire cutting, 8-inch.. 






24 


Plugs, spark, |-inch, SAE 
standard " Titan." 






14 


Tape, friction, rolls 






14 


Tape, rubber, roll 






il 


Wire, copper, No. 16 gauge 
(B.&S. spool). 




' | 


1 1 


Wire, soft steel, No. 16 




■ 


1 


gauge (B. & S. spool). 
Chest, fluid "A" 


Carried on top of supply 
chests. 


X 10 


1 2 


Brush, varnish, No. 6-0 


i 


13 


Brush, for camouflage, 4- 
inch. 




■ 1 


20 


Cans, 2|-gallon capacity (6 
will contain lubricating 
oil; 6 will contain recoil 
cylinder oil; 2 will contain 
camouflage paint, green; 
2 will contain camouflage 
paint, brown; 2 will con- 
tain camouflage paint, 




'! 




gray: 2 Avill contain coal 
oil). 
Oil, coal, gallon 








1 5 








Uf) 


Oil, recoil cylinder, gallon . . 








15 


Oil, lubricating, gallon 








1 


Paste, stencil, black, box. 








1 


Paste, stencil, white, box. . J 






\5 


Paint for camouflage, green, 1 




1 




gallon. 








' 5 


Paint for camouflage, j 
brown, gallon. 








•5 


Paint for camouflage, grey, : 
gallon. ; 









Expendable, quantities are for a six months 'supply. 



126 



STATEMENT OF TOTAL EQUIPMENT OF ONE 4.7-INCH GUN BATTERY 
MOTORIZED ON WAR FOOTING— Continued. 




ARTICLES CARRIED ON ARTIL- 
LERY SUPPLY TRUCK — COntd. 

Strap, 34 inches long, style DV, 

8 holes. 
Strap, 52 inches long, style DV, 
10 holes (the above straps are 
for use on thespring chest, the 
fluid chest, and the two sup- 
ply chests). 
Chest, grindstone: 

Grindstone, with frame, 

complete. 
Wrench, grindstone spanner 
Chest, carpenter's, with tools, 
complete: 
1 carpenter's chest 

1 ax, bench 

2 bags , canvas, for small 
stores. 

1 bevel, 8-inch 

6 bits, auger, gizes 0.25, 0.5, 

0.75, 1, 1.25, and 1.5 inch. 
1 bit, expansive, 2 cutters, 

0.875 to 3-inch. 

3 bits, screw-driver, sizes 
0.375, 0.625. and 0.75 inch. 

1 bit, wood countersink, 
0.625-inch diameter. 

1 brace, ratchet, 10-inch 
s;weep. 

3 chisels, socket, framing, 
sizes 0.75, 1, and 1.5 inch. 

1 divider, wing, 10-inch 

4 drills, twist, sizes 0.187 
(■&), 0.218 (^), 0.25, and 
0.281 (^). 

1 file, 10-inch, flat, bastard.. 
6 files, saw, sizes 4 and 6 
inch. 

1 gauge, marking 

2 gauges, socket, firmer, 
sizes 0.5 and 1. 

1 hammer, claw 

2 handles, file 

1 tool, handle, containing 10 

tools. 
1 knife, drawing, 9-inch 

blade. 

1 mallet 

lnailset 

1 oiler 

1 stone, oil, unmounted 

1 pincers, small, 6-inch 

1 plane, jack, 16-inch 



Where carried. 



Property 
classification. 



Sec- 
tion. 




Carried in bench chest. 



127 



STATEMENT OF TOTAL EQUIPMENT OF ONE 4.7-INCH GUN BATTERY 
MOTORIZED ON WAR FOOTING— Continued. 



Article. 



Where earried. 



Property 
classification. 



Class. 



Sec- 
tion. 



ARTICLES CARRIED ON ARTIL- 
LERY supply truck— contd. 

Chest, carpenters, with tools, 
complete— Continued. 
1 plane, smoothing, 8-inch . . 

1 handle, plate, auger 

1 rasp, wood, 10-inch 

1 reamer, half-round 

1 rule, boxwood, 2-foot, 4- 

fold. 
lsaw, crosscut, 24-inch, 7- 

point. 
1 saw, rip, 24-inch, 5-point. . 

1 set, saw 

1 screw driver, 5-inch blade. 

1 spoke shave 

1 square, steel 

1 tape , linen, 100 feet 

1 vise, table, 2.5-inch jaw. . . 
1 wrench, screw (12 inches) , 
Chest for cleaning material and 
small stores: 

Brush, sash, No. 3 

Brush, sash, No. 5 

Brush, camel's hair 

Burners, lantern 

Chamois skin , 

Cloth, crocus, quire 

Cloth, emery, No. 0, quire. . 
Cloth, emery, No. 00, quire. 
Cloth, emery, No. |, quire. . 

Globes, lantern 

Dressing, leather, russet, 

boxes. 
Outfit, marking, leather 
Outfit, marking, metal 

Oil, clock, ounce 

Oil, raw linseed, pint 

Petrolatum (in tin box), 

ounces. 

Sal soda, pounds 

Seal stamp (in stencil box) . . 

Outfit, stencil 

Plate, stencil, Ordnance 

Department insignia. 
Sandpaper, No. 00, quire. . . 
Sandpaper, No. 2\, quire. . . 

Wicks, lantern 

Chest, miscellaneous 

Box, oil 



Carried in bench chest 




10 



Chest, for testing level . . 
Level, testing complete. 



Carried in bench chest 

Carried in miscellaneous 

chest. 
do 



Carried in testing level 
chest. 






Expendable, quantities are for a six months' supply 



128 



STATEMENT OF TOTAL EQUIPMENT OF ONE 4.7-INCH GUN BATTERY 
MOTORIZED ON WAR FOOTING— Continued. 









Property 
classification. 


Num- 


Article. 


Where carried. 




ber. 












Class. 


Sec- 
tion. 




ARTICLES CARRIED ON ARTIL- 










LERY supply truck— contd. 








5 


Cans, 1-gallon capacity, em- 
bossed, light slushing oil. 












6 


Cans, J-gallon capacity (1 
will contain sperm oil, 1 
will contain neat's-foot 






oil, 1 will contain olive 


X 10 




drab paint, secondcoat; 1 






will contain olive drab 






paint, third coat; 1 will 








contain Japan drier, 1 will 








contain Cosmic No. 80, 








soft). 






;| 


Cosmic, Japan, gallon 








Oil, neat's-foot, gallon 








1 5 


Oil, light slushing, gallon. . . 








i i 


Oil, sperm, gallon 




X 


10 


Paint, olive drab, second 










coat, gallon. 






H 


Paint, olive drab, third 










coat, gallon. 








1 


Tool kit, saddler's, sheepskin, 
with tools complete: 
X saddler's sheepskin tool 


















kit. 










12 blades, awl, harness, Nos. 
43 to 48, inclusive. 


















1 awl, pegging 










1 awl, seat, handled 










1 bag, canvas, for small 










stores. 










1 carriage, pricking, 3 wheels. 










1 compass, 6-inch 










1 greaser, double, lignum 










vitae. 










1 tool, edge, No. 1 










1 tool, edge, No. 2 


In saddler's tool kit 


X 


■ 




2 blades, extra with follow- 


9 




ers for draw gauge. 










1 gauge, draw, brass, with- 










out guard. 










1 hammer, No. 3, riveting. . . 










1 handle, peg awl, with 










wrench. 










2 hafts, patent awl, with 










wrench. 










1 knife, round 










1 knife, splitting, 6-inch 

1 needlecase, leather 

1 needle, glover's, No. 3, 






















paper. 









Expendable, quantities are for a six months' supply. 



129 



STATEMENT OF TOTAL EQUIPMENT OF ONE 4.7-INCH GUN BATTERY 
MOTORIZED ON WAR FOOTING— Continued. 



Num- 


Article. 


Where carried. 


Property- 
classification. 


ber. 


Class. 


Sec- 
tion. 


1 


ARTICLES CARRIED ON ARTIL- 
LERY supply truck— contd. 

Tool kit, saddler's, sheepskin, 
with tools complete — Contd. 

2 neodles, harness, No. 4, 
pa^er. 

2 neMles, harness, No. 5, 
paner. 

2 neadles, harness, No. 6, 
paper. 

12 needles, sacking, as- 
sorted. 

1 niopers, cutting, 10-inch. . . 

1 oilstone, unmounted 


■In saddler's tool kit 

[Carried in floor locker 

[....do 

ICarrie-1 where most ex- 
pedient. 

....do 

do 


X 

IV 

X 

IV 

X 

IV 

X 






4 punches, round, assorted.. 
1 punch, revolving, 4 tubes. 
1 rivet set 







1 rule, boxwood, 2-foot, 4- 

fold. 
1 palm, sewing, leather 






1 shears, 10-inch, bent 

trimmers. 
1 knife, shoe, broad point. . . 
1 knife, shoe, square point . . 






1 screw driver, 3-inch blade. 




4 


2 thimbles, best aluminum 
lined, two sizes. 




4 






4 






3 






2 

120 


Handles, sledge, model of 1913. . 




*25 
2 


Waste, white cotton, pounds. . . 


10 


»1 

'1 

2 


Rope, manila, 1 inch diameter, 
150 feet long. 

Rivets and burrs, brass 0.5-inch, 
No. 10, pound. 

Rivets and burrs, brass 0.625- 
inch, No. 10, pound. 

Handles, shovel long 


9 
10 


16 
»1 


Elaies, awl, harness assorted, 
No. 43-48, inclusive. (New 
England Awl & Needle Co.). 

Hafts, awl patent, with wrench, 
C S. Osborne Co., No. 146. 


....do 


9 



1 Expendable, quantities are for a six months' supply. 
49877°— 18 9 



130 



STATEMENT OP TOTAL EQUIPMENT OF ONE 4.7-INCH GUN BATTERY 
MOTORIZED ON WAR FOOTING— Continued. 



Num- 
ber. 



*10 

115 

110 

150 
150 
125 

110 
123 

125 

15 

125 

110 

12 
110 
il 
11 
il 
11 

1100 

12 

12 
11 

»1 

il 
il 
il 

il 
il 
123 
133 

1 

1 

113 

1 

2 



Article. 



Carried whero most ex- 
pedient. 



.do. 



.do. 
.do. 



ARTICLES CARRIED ON ARTIL- 
LERY supply truck — contd. 

Buckles, bar, tongueless, f- 

inch, bronze. 
Buckles, bar tongueless, 1-inch, 

bronze. 
Buckles, roller bar, f-inch, 

bronze. 
Buckles, roller, lj-incri, bronze. . 
Buckles, satchel, f-inch, bronze . 
Buckles, wire, f-inch, brass 

wire. 
Button, style 1, with washer — 
Duck, cotton, olive drab, 22- 

incn, No. 1, yards. 

Clip, end, f-inch, brass 

Clip, end, 1-inch, brass 

Clip, end, lj-inch, brass 

Fastening, Larr durable female, 

4 male. 

Hook, side strap, wheel 

Fastening mills military 

Needles, Glover's No. 3, papers. . 
Needles, harness, No. 4, papers. . 
Needles, harness, No. 5, papers. . 
Needles, harness, No. 6, papers- . 
Rope, f-inch, manila hemp, feet. 
Screws, wood, 1 brass, No. 6, 1- 

gross packages. 

Sheepskins with wool on 

Tacks, copper, No. 12§, pounds 

paper. 
Tacks, copper, No. 20§, pounds 

paper. 
Thimble, aluminum lined steel, 

size f-inch. 
Thread, carpet, No. 18, olive 

drab, pound. 
Thread, shoe, No. 3, brown, 

pound. 
Thread, shoe, No. 10, brown, 

pound. 
Wax, stitching brown, winter, 

pound. 
Webbing, olive drab, cotton, 

heavy, f-inch, yard. 
Webbing, olive drab, cotton, 

heavy, 1-inch, yard. 

Sledge, model of 1913 

Block, snatch, for 1. 25-inch rope . 

Soap, castile, cakes 

Block, tackle, double, 8-mch — 
Bucket, water, galvanized steel . 

1 Expendable, quantities are for a six months' supply. 



Where carried. 



.do. 
.do. 



.do. 



Property 

classification. 



Class. 



IV 



JV 
X 
IV 



Sec- 
tion. 



10 



10 



131 



STATEMENT OP TOTAL EQUIPMENT OP ONE 4.7-INCH GUN BATTER* 
MOTORIZED ON WAR FOOTING— Continued. 



Num- 
ber. 



Article. 



ARTICLES CARRIED ON ARTIL- 
LERY supply truck— contd. 

Additional tools and accessories 
carried only when truck is 
supplying a 4.7-inch gun 
battery: 

Bolt 

Muzzle, bore sight, complete 

Breech, bore sight 

Chain sling 

Chest for spare breech 
mechanism. 

Chest for spare sights 

Chest - for duplex chain 
block. 

Track, cleaning 

Clip 

Block, duplex chain, Yale 
& Towne, 2-ton. 

Funnels, filling, cylinder. . . 

Tool, hub liner driving 

Jacks, lever 

Eyes, retracting 

Compressors, spring, No. 4.. 

Covers, spare hub 

Brush, slush 

Caps, spare staff coupling. . . 



Where carried. 



Carried whero most c: 
pedient. 



.do. 



}....do. 
do. 



.do. 



Property 
classification. 



Class. 



IV 



IV 



IV 



Sec- 
tion, 



AMMUNITION. 



The proportion of 45-pound shell and 60-pound shell shrapnel 
carried is subject to regulation by the proper authority. The 
ammunition is carried in the caissons and ammunition trucks. The 
property classification is class VI, section 3. 



No. to battery. 


Capacity of each. 


For 
shrapnel. 


For 

45-pound 
shell. 


For 

60-pound 
shell. 






23 
70 
43 


23 
81 
53 


28 


6 ammunition trucks l . . 


f?-ton ammunition truck... 
\2-ton ammunition truck... 


70 
46 



May bo either 2 or 3 ton, in any proportion to total six. 



INDEX 



A. 

Page. 

Adapter and booster casing, Mark II 24 

Adapter and booster casing, Mark IV 25 

Adjusting instruments 105 

Ammunition 17 

Ammunition, allowance of 28 

Ammunition chest, caisson . 76 

Ammunition truck. 86 

Apron, caisson 77 

Apron, carriage 56 

Apron latch ". 57 

Artillery supply truck 86 

Axle (caisson) 76 

Axle (carriage) 46 

Axle (carnage) to dismount 64 

Axle (carriage limber) . . 70 

Azimuth pointer 53 

B. 

Base detonating fuze. 24 

Block carrier 12 

Block latch 12 

Bolt snaps 87 

Brake (caisson, model 1916 , band brake) 78 

Brake (caisson, model 1916, tire brake) 77 

Brake (caisson, model 1917) 85 

Brake (carriage, band brake) 56 

Brake (carriage, tire brake) 55 

Breech mechanism: 

Action 13 

Description 8 

To dismantle '.. 14 

Nomenclature of parts 16 

0. 
Caisson, model of 1916: 

Description 76 

Nomenclature of parts 72 

Weights, dimensions, etc 71 

(133) 



134 

Caisson, model of 1917: Page. 

Description 84 

Nomenclature of parts 79 

Weights, dimensions, etc 79 

Caisson prop . 77 

Care and maintenance of materiel, suggestions for 

Carriage: 

Action of 52 

Assembling 58 

Description 45 

Dismounting 58 

Nomenclature of parts 32 

Weights, dimensions, etc 31 

Carriage parts, care and cleaning of 65 

Carpenter's chest 36 

Cartridge case 17 

Chests for artillery supply truck 86 

Chest doors (caisson) 84 

Combination fuzes, F. A 21 

Connecting pole (caisson) 85 

Contents, table of 3 

Counter recoil buffer 66 

Cradle, complete 48 

Cradle, to dismount 62 

Cradle band, front 49 

Cradle band, rear 49 

Cylinder head 50 

D. 

Diaphragms (caisson) 87 

Drill cartridge 30 

Dust guard 52 

E. 

Elevating and traversing lock 54 

Elevating bevel gear 53 

Elevating bevel gear, to dismount 63 

Elevating bevel pinion 53 

Elevating bevel pinion, to dismount 63 

Elevating gear bracket 53 

Elevating mechanism: 

Action of 53 

To assemble 63 

Elevating pinion shafts 53 

Elevating screw, to dismount 63 

Elevating screws cover 53 

Elevating yoke side. 53 

Elevating yoke transom 53 

Equipment, list of 6 

Equipment, table of total, for one battery. 112 

Extension rail, to assemble 59 



135 

Page. 

Extension rail, to dismount . 58 

Extension rail body. 48 

Extension rail carrier 49 

Extractor ........... 12 

F. 

Firing bracket 51 

Firing device 51 

Firing handle 51 

Firing handle shaft 51 

Firing lock case 15 

Firing mechanism (carriage) , action of 51 

Firing mechanism (gun) : 

Description 10 

To dismantle 14 

Firing pin. 10 

Firing pin spring 10 

Flash lights, allowance of Ill 

Flasks 47 

Frankford Arsenal, 31-second combination fuze 22 

Fuzes ... 21 

G. 

General information 105 

Gland: 

Adjustment. 61 

To assemble '. 61 

Gun: 

Care of 15 

Care in dismounting 58 

Description 7 

To dismount 58 

To mount. . 58 

Weights, dimensions, etc . 7 

n. 

Hand fuze setter, model of 1913: 

Adaptability to other guns 30 

Adjustment 30 

Description 23 

Operation 30 

Hinge pin 13 

Hub liner, to remove 64 

I. 

Identifying paint marks on delay action fuzes. .............. 27 

Index 133 

Inner counter recoil springs ............'...... 51 

Inner elevating screw 54 

Intermediate plates 85 



136 

L. 

Limber, carriage: Page. 

Description. 70 

Nomenclature of parts f.8 

Weights, dimension of 07 

List of plates. ; . . 5 

Lock bolt 54 

Lock bolt casing 54 

M. 

Main shield 56 

Marking on ammunition packing boxes : 27 

Marking on fuze packing boxes 27 

Middle counter recoil spring 51 

Misfires and hangfires a 31 

Motor equipment 86 

0. 

Oils for artillery materiel 106 

Oil can, caisson. 85 

Oil tank, ammunition supply truck 36 

Operating lever 12 

Operating lever latch 13 

Outer counter recoil spring3 51 

Outer elevating screw 

P. 

Padlocks 87 

Painting artillery materiel 105 

Panoramic sight case 57 

Pintle 85 

Pintle, carriage limber 70 

Pintle bolt, carriage limber 70 

Pintle bearing 48, 85 

Pintle bearing support 85 

Pintle yoke 48 

Pintle yoke, to dismount. 64 

Piston, to remove. 60 

Piston rod 50 

Piston rod, to remove 60 

Piston rod head 50 

Pole socket 70 

Powder charge 19 

Plates, list of 5 

Primer 110 gr. percussion 18 

Projectiles . 19 



137 

Q. 

Quadrant, range: Page. 

Adjustment of 101 

.Care of 100 

Description 97 

Spare. 105 

To adjust 102 

Use of...... 99 

R. 

Range table 29 

Recoil indicator 52 

Recoil indicator throw, to remove 5G 

Recoil cylinder: 

Care and cleaning of 65 

Description. 49-50 

To assemble 59 

To dismount 59 

To drain 59 

To fill - 60 

Reconnaissance car 88 

Reloading and cleaning outfit 31 

Repairs for field artillery materiel ..... 107 

Riveting, instructions for 107 

S. 

Sear. 10 

Shell, 45-pound. 20 

Shell, 60-pound 19 

Shield: 

Description 56 

To dismount 62 

Shoulder guard 57 

Shrapnel. 21 

Sights: • 

Additional tests for 104 

Adjustment of ... 101 

Care of 100 

Spare ....... 105 

Use of... m 99 

Verification of parallelism of lines of 102 

Sight, front: 

Care of 100 

Description 88 

To adjust ........ 102 

Sights, line : 88 



138 

Sight, panoramic, model of 1917: Page- 
Care of .... .. 90 

Description 100 

To adjust 101 

Use of 99 

Sight, rear: 

Care of 100 

Description 88 

To adjust 102 

Spade 46 

Spring compressor 58 

Spring cylinder 51 

Spring rod 51 

Spring rod yoke 51 

Spring stirrup, inner 51 

Spring stirrup, outer 51 

Spring stirrup head, inner . . . 51 

Spring stirrup head, outer 51 

Spring system: 

To assemble 61 

To dismount 62 

Stuffing box 49 

Stuffing box, to pack 60 

Supplies in general Ill 

T. 

Targets 105 

Telephone and motor battery type truck 86 

Top carriage (carriage limber) 70 

Top carriage rail (carriage limber) 70 

Top shield 56 

Total equipment for one battery together with expendable 

supplies 112 

Tractor, 5-ton. 87 

Trail: 

Description. 46 

To dismount . .... 64 

Trail prop 47 

Traveling lock 55 

Traveling lock frame 55 

Traveling lock legs ...... .... 55 

Traversing bracket . 53 

Traversing bracket, to dismount 64 

Traversing gear, to dismount 63 

Traversing handwheel 53 

Traversing nut . 53 

Traversing screw 53 

Traversing screw bracket : . . ............. 53 

Trigger fork. 11 

Trigger shaft . 11 

Trunnion band. .......................................... 49 



189 

w. 

Wheels: Page. 

Rubber-tired. . . . . 45 

Steel-tired .................v.............. . 34 

Description. 45 

To remove ... .................. 45 

Wheel fastening 46 

War Department, 

Office of the Chief of Ordnance, 

Washington, March 25, 1918, 
Form No. 1784. 
Ed. Mar. 25-18—10,000. 



LB D 13 



4 



